Untitled - Dibble Optical
A
Machines
A2
A6
A 12
A 20
A 26
A 30
A 32
A 34
A 40
A 44
A 48
A 50
A 51
Digital Pupilometers
Lensmeters
Ultrasonic Cleaning Devices
Frame Heaters
Lens Groovers
Diamond Hand Edgers
Polishing Motors
Drilling Machines
Soldering Units
Small Devices
Tinting Unit and Accessories
CLAVULUS and Accessories
Safety Goggles
A
2
Often copied, never matched!
Made in Japan, the PD meter’s excellent workmanship, ergonomics and outstanding design make it an attractive product.
Simple and easy to use, with a digital display, integrated CVD measurement and of course its excellent design is a prime example of the ideal
combination of design and function. The Design PD meter will make your spectacle dispensing stand out twice as clearly.
Total PD measurement LCD
Single PD-display
Switch to change from PD
measurement to back vertex
measurement
Off/On switch
Smooth
measurement slider
Adjustable focal distance: 30 cm to ∞
Enlargement switch for spectacle wearer
PD indication line
Stationary corneal line
Top of the cornea
Back of lens
A
3
B & S Design Pupilometer
The superb ergonomically designed PD measuring device from B & S,
sits perfectly in the hand.
• Switch to select between monocular and binocular measurement
• Illuminated focal point ensures easy reading from the corneal reflection
• Large, easily readable LC display with simultaneous display of total and
individual PD
• Measurement of cornea vertex distance by switching measurement of
inter-pupil distance (PD) to measurement of CVD
• Smooth sliders for measuring PD
• Battery saving feature automatically switches off after 1 minute
• Enlargement switch for spectacle wearer
2385 00
Technical data
Display:
LC display
Focusing:
Light circle
PD measurement range
Binocular:
46.0 to 82.0 mm in steps of 0.5 mm
Monocular:
23.0 to 41.0 mm in steps of 0.5 mm
Measuring distance can
be selected from:
30, 35, 40, 50, 65 cm; 1.0, 2.0 m; ∞
Dimensions (w x h x d):
155 x 52 x 220 mm
Voltage supply:
4 x 1.5 V Micro (type AAA)
Weight:
655 g incl. batteries
36 month warranty!
A
4
Total PD measurement LCD
Off/On switch
Single PD-display
Smooth
measurement slider
Switch to change from PD
measurement to back vertex
measurement
Adjustable focal distance:
30 cm to ∞
Enlargement switch for spectacle wearer
Pupilometer
Pupilometer with digital display for simple and precise measurement
of the pupil distance.
• Switch to select between monocular and binocular measurement
• Illuminated focal point ensures easy reading from the corneal reflection
• Large, easily readable LC display with simultaneous display of total
and individual PD
• Measurement of cornea vertex distance by switching measurement
of pupil distance (PD) to measurement of CVD
• Enlargement switch for spectacle wearer
Technical data
Display:
LC display
Focusing:
Light circle
Measured range
Binocular:
45.0 to 82.0 mm in steps of 0.5 mm
Monocular:
22.5 to 41.0 mm in steps of 0.5 mm
Measuring distance can
be selected from:
30, 35, 40, 50, 65 cm; 1.0, 2.0 m; ∞
Dimensions (w x h x d):
166 x 63 x 221 mm
Voltage supply:
2 x 1.5 V Mignon (type AA)
Weight:
680 g
2387 00
12 month warranty!
A
5
Total PD measurement LCD
Off/On switch
Single PD-display
Digital display for the selection
of measuring distance
Push buttons for PD
measurement in 0.5 mm steps
Adjustable measuring distance:
30 cm – ∞
Switch to select between monocular
and binocular measurement
Hold button for PD and measuring distance
Pupilometer
Digital pupilometer for simple and precise measurement of the pupil
distance.
• Large, easily readable LC display with simultaneous display of total
and individual PD
• Results of the measurement can be stored by simple press of a button
Technical data:
Display:
LC display
Focusing:
Light circle
Measured range
Binocular:
45.0 to 82.0 mm in steps of 0.5 mm
Monocular:
22.5 to 41.0 mm in steps of 0.5 mm
Measuring distance can
2391 00
be selected from:
30, 35, 40, 50, 65 cm; 1.0 m, 2.0 m and ∞
Dimensions (w x h x d):
165 x 50 x 250 mm
Voltage supply:
4 x 1,5 V (type AA)
Weight:
697 g
12 month warranty!
A
6
Automatic Lensmeter
TL-2000C Design
• Colour touch-screen, 5.7 inch
• Button assignment and display colour
individually adjustable
• Measurement of the refractive index
• Automatic measurement and data memory
• Automatic measuring of the newest
progressive lenses
• Improved high-precision marker unit
• Built-in printer
• Power supply: AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz,
35 to 55 W
2362 20
220 x 438 x 260 mm
6 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Normal mode
Progressive mode (far)
Progressive mode (near)
Automatic Lensmeter
TL-3000C Design
Technically as No. 2362 20, plus in addition:
• Measurement of pupil distance, UV- penetrability
and graphical representation of UV transmission
• Automatic change over to contact lens mode
2364 20
220 x 438 x 260 mm
6 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
A
7
A
8
Automatic Lensmeter
BS-3000
• Color touch-screen, 5.7 inch
• Button assignment and display colour
individually adjustable
• Measurement of the refractive index
• Automatic measurement and data memory
• Automatic measuring of the newest
progressive lenses
• Built-in printer
• Power supply: AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz,
35 to 55 W
2364 10
220 x 438 x 260 mm
7 kg
12 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Exclusive at B&S
Starting mode
Automatic measuring unit for progressive lenses
Optic index program
Output mode
Ocular Lensmeter
A
9
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Compact and inexpensive
Easy to handle
Bright and clear visible measuring mark
Internal reading
Including prism compensator
Marking system: with ink pad
Alignment: with movable dot circle
and reticule
• Power supply: 220 V/15 W
Standard equipment:
1 electric bulb, 2 ink pads, 1 box of ink,
1 lens pressing unit, 3 marking pins
2355 10
150 x 390 x 226 mm
3,7 kg
12 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Lens marking
Clear axis scale
Spherical lens
Cylindrical lens, 1st power meridian
Cylindrical lens, 2nd power meridian
A
10
Technical Data for all Devices at a Glance
Technical Data
2364 20
TL-3000C
2362 20
TL-2000C
2364 10
BS-3000
2355 10
Ocular-Lensmeter
Measuring range
Sphere: – 25 to + 25 dpt.
X
X
X
Cylinder: – 10 to + 10 dpt.
X
X
X
Axis: 0° to 180°
X
X
X
Addition: 0 to 10 dpt.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Diopters: 0.01/0.12/0.25 dpt.
X
X
X
Prism: 0.01/0.12/0.25 Δ
X
X
X
X
X
X
Prism: Decentralisation
X
X
X
Prism: Resulting prism
X
X
X
X
X
Prism: 0 to 15 Δ
Prism: 0 to 10 Δ
X
Measuring units
Prism display: Cartesian and
polar coordinates
Measurements
Optical measuring light: Ø 2.5 mm/5 mm
X
X
Optical measuring light: Ø 3 mm
Pupil distance: 50 to 86 mm (steps 0.5 mm)
X
X
X
X
X
UV transmission: 0 to 100 % (385 nm)
+ illustration of UV transmission
Measures standard lenses
X
X
X
X
Measures bifocals
X
X
X
X
Measures trifocals
X
X
X
Measures progressive lenses
X
X
X
Measures contact lenses
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Thermal printer (MTP-Typ)
X
X
X
Data storage for 99 single measurements
X
X
X
Monitor display
Color touch-screen
LCD, background illuminated
External communication
RS-232C serial interface
Printer
Accessories for all Tomey Lensmeters*
A
11
Ink Cartridges for TL-2000C
and TL-3000C
Printing Paper for TL-2000C
and TL-3000C
• For uncoated lenses
• Roll width: 57 mm
• Roll diameter: 45 mm
Blue
2364 22
3 pieces
2364 51
10 rolls
• For special coated and uncoated lenses
• High contrast during the centring and blocking
process of lenses, especially for tinted lenses
White
2364 23
3 pieces
Ink Cartridges for BS-3000
Printing Paper for BS-3000
• For uncoated lenses
• Suitable for: TL-100, TL-2000B, TL-3000B
• Roll width: 37 mm
• Roll diameter: 25 mm
• Suitable for: TL-100, TL-2000B, TL-3000B
Blue
2359 59
3 pieces
• For special coated and uncoated lenses
• High contrast during the centring and blocking
process of lenses, especially for tinted lenses
White
2359 60
3 pieces
Ink for Ocular Lensmeter
2355 12
2 pieces
* Older spare parts available on request
2356 51
3 rolls
2363 02
10 rolls
A
12
OPTOSONIC Cleaning Devices
Professional unit “MADE IN GERMANY”
Optimized results
• Perfect cleaning by adapted 37 kHz technology
• Sweep function for optimum distribution of the sonic field in the tank
• Degas function for effective cleaning
Extensive equipment
• Cleaning tank made of corrosion resistant stainless
steel – provides quick and efficient cleaning
• Stainless steel housing, extremely durable and easy to clean
• Noise reducing cover
Easy handling
• User-friendly, sealed operating controls
• Rotary switch for pre-selecting the cleaning time between 1 and 30 min
• LED function indicator for a quick overview
A
13
OPTOSONIC Silence “The Silent Classic”
• Exceptionally quiet when operating, ideal for the dispensing area
• Cleaning frequency 80 kHz
• Compact and robust unit with 0.8 l tank
2977 00
36 month warranty!
Technical Data:
Tank (l x h x w):
190 x 60 x 85 mm
Tank capacity:
approx. 0.8 l
Capacity:
30 W
Frequency:
80 kHz
Voltage, power:
230 V, 30 W
Size (l x h x w):
206 x 178 x 116 mm
Weight:
2 kg
Available basket:
2974 10
A
14
OPTOSONIC “The Classic”
• Reliable device with 0.8 l tank
2974 00
36 month warranty!
OPTOSONIC “The Advanced”
• Comfortable device with 2.8 l tank
• Rotary switch on the side for draining the cleaning fluid.
Outlet valve on the rear of the machine
• Carrying handle in plastic
• More cleaning power, thus better cleaning effect
2975 00
36 month warranty!
OPTOSONIC “The Advanced – including Heating”
Technically as No. 2975 00, plus in addition:
• The cleaning process can be started with or without
temperature control
• Heating protected against dry operation for an even better
cleaning result
• Rotary switch to adjust temperature setting between
30 and 80 °C in 5 steps
• LED for desired and actual values for the temperature of the fluid
2976 00
36 month warranty!
Technical data
2974 00
2975 00
Tank (w x h x d):
190 x 60 x 85 mm
240 x 100 x 137 mm
2976 00
240 x 100 x 137 mm
Tank capacity:
approx. 0.8 l
approx. 2.8 l
approx. 2.8 l
Capacity:
30 W
80 W
280 W
Frequency:
37 kHz
37 kHz
37 kHz
Voltage, power:
230 V, 30 W
230 V, 80 W
230 V, 280 W, including 200 W for integrated heater
Size (w x h x d):
206 x 178 x 116 mm
300 x 214 x 179 mm
300 x 214 x 179 mm
Weight:
2 kg
3.3 kg
3.3 kg
Available baskets:
2974 10
2949 00, 2975 10
2949 00, 2975 10
A
15
Built-in Ultrasonic Cleaner
Technical data
• New compact device: container and generator in the same housing,
separate control panel with timer
• With integrated drain for easy fitting in service desks
• Same technique as unit No. 2974 00; e.g. with permanent
sweep-function for perfect cleaning results
2970 10
Tank (w x h x d):
190 x 60 x 85 mm
Tank capacity:
approx. 0.8 l
Capacity:
30 W
Frequency:
37 kHz
Voltage, power:
230 V, 30 W
Size (w x h x d):
206 x 178 x 116 mm
Weight:
2 kg
Available basket:
2974 10
36 month warranty!
Accessories and Cleaning Concentrates
2975 10
2974 10
177 x 35 x 74 mm
without handles
200 x 55 x 107 mm
without handles
211 g
400 g
Metal Basket
Metal Basket
For ultrasonic cleaners No. 2974 00 and 2970 10.
For ultrasonic cleaners No. 2975 00 and 2976 00.
3157 00
1l
3157 25
2.5 l
3158 00
1l
OPTOCLEAN
Cleaning Concentrate
Cleaning concentrate 1: 20 for frames and lenses (also plastic lenses) in
combination with ultra sound. Dilute with 20 parts water, rinse clean parts
with running water and dry.
Alkaline cleaning concentrate, 1:9 ratio; for extremely dirty metal
frames, jewellery and other metal parts, for ultrasonic cleaners. The ammonia ingredient will brighten and freshen up the fine metals as well as
coloured metals in an optimal way. The cleaned parts should be rinsed
thoroughly under running water and then dried.
OPTOCLEAN is a very effective but mild cleaning solution which
is suitable for cleaning sensitive materials such as polycarbonate
and Trivex.
Do not use this cleaning solution on polycarbonate and Trivex
lenses or other coated plastic lenses.
A
16
A
17
A clear example of a perfect cleaning service.
The high quality ultrasonic cleaner “Made in Germany” for your sales area. Its attractive design and fully developed technology produce results
worth seeing. Easy to use, and with a digital display. High quality electronic equipment ensures reliability.
OPTISONIC Ultrasonic Device
•
•
•
•
•
High performance, in plastic housing, in B & S design
High quality electronics
Special steel tank incl. plastic basket
Tilting cover incl. condensed water drain
Inclined display of strong contrast for comfortable and easy
control of ON/OFF and TIME by foil keypad
• Cable winding at the rear side with gripping cavity for safe
transportation
Technical data
Tank (w x h x d):
194 x 84 x 60 mm
Working capacity:
0.6 l
Tank capacity:
approx. 0.9 l
Capacity:
40 W
Frequency:
35 kHz
Voltage, power:
90 to 240 V, 40 W
Size (w x h x d):
293 x 175 x 180 mm
Weight:
1.8 kg
Basket:
Included
2971 00
36 month warranty!
A
18
Ultrasonic Baths
For Cleaning Frames and Jewellery – Personal Use
Extra Large
•
•
•
•
•
Extra large stainless steel basin
Including heating
With timer to stop automatically after a preset time
With cover and basket
Suitable for longer use
2973 70
Technical data
Outside size (wxhxd):
265 x 180 x 230 mm
Container capacity:
2.0 l
Voltage:
220 to 240 V, 50Hz
Power:
160 W
Frequency:
35 kHz
Weight:
2.2 kg
12 month warranty!
Large
•
•
•
•
With timer to stop automatically after a preset time
High quality materials, with stainless steel basin and cover
Suitable for longer use
With basket
2973 40
Technical data
Outside size (wxhxd):
200 ×180 ×160 mm
Container capacity:
1.4 l
Voltage:
220 to 240 V
Power:
60 to 70 W
Frequency:
42 kHz
Weight:
1,750 g
5 work cycles:
90, 180, 280, 380 and 480 s
12 month warranty!
A
19
With Detachable Tank
•
•
•
•
Detachable tank to make changing water easy
Plastic housing with stainless steel basin
With timer to stop automatically after a preset time
With basket and watch holder
2973 60
Technical data
Outside size (w x h x d):
200 x 195 x 150 mm
Container capacity:
0.6 l
Voltage:
220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power:
50 W
Frequency:
42 kHz
Weight:
1,250 g
5 work cycles:
90, 180, 280, 380 and 480 s
12 month warranty!
Small
• Plastic housing with stainless steel basin
• With inner lighting
• With basket and watch holder
2973 50
Technical data
Outside size (w x h x d):
200 x 138 x 150 mm
Container capacity:
0.6 l
Voltage:
220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power:
50 W
Frequency:
42 kHz
Weight:
900 g
Automatic switch off:
3 min
12 month warranty!
A
20
A must for all opticians who place value on comfortable working and good design.
This device shows competence and is perfect for working in the sales area. The OPTIFORMA can be built into the service desk. Frames can
be heated in almost total silence. A digital temperature and time setting for gentle processing of sensitive materials is an expression of a
genuine quality product made in Germany.
1
OPTIFORMA-Profi
Technical data
•
•
•
•
•
•
Quiet running
Stepless temperature and time setting via LCD and keys
Menu driven handling
Installed overheat protection
Auto cut out if unit is knocked over in case of device inclination
Can be built into work bench or service desk, installation
depth: 145 mm
• Including a template to use on a work top with a max. of
28 mm thickness
• Distance between the air jets: 45 mm
• Jet for spot heating
Temperature scale:
60 to 140 °C
Adjustable operating time:
50 to 249 s
Voltage:
230 V
Power:
800 W
Overheating protection through thermo switch
Melting fuse:
6.3 A
Measurement (w x h x d):
230 x 228 x 275 mm
Weight:
2.1 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Black/Grey
2872 01
Light blue/Grey
2872 22
Template for OPTIFORMA Profi No. 2872 . .
2872 25
A
21
O Design-
Zentrum
NordrheinWestfalen
Design innovations
Award for
high quality design
OPTIFORMA-Standard
•
•
•
•
•
•
Technical data
Temperature level adjustable using a potentiometer
Additional device for pointed heating
Colours: Black/Grey and Light blue/Grey
Auto cut out if unit is knocked over in case of device inclination
Thermal overload protection
Distance between the air jets: 45 mm
Measurement (w x h x d):
170 x 228 x 190 mm
Temperature scale:
80 to 140 °C
Overheating protection through thermo switch
Voltage, power:
230 V, 800 W
Melting fuse:
8A
36 month warranty!
Black/Grey
2871 01
Light blue/Grey
2871 22
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Frame Heater OPTIMONSUN
A
22
•
•
•
•
•
With plastic cup Ø 85 mm, slit width 30 mm
Without temperature control
Complete with beaker and spot heating jet
Metal housing
2 m helix cable
2867 . .
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
2867 01
Metallic
Black
2867 10
Metallic
Grey
2867 15
Blue
2867 22
White
Frame Heater OPTIMONSUN Electronic
•
•
•
•
•
•
With plastic cup Ø 85 mm, slit width 30 mm
With constant electronic temperature control
Temperature variable adjustable
Complete with beaker and spot heating jet
Metal housing
2 m helix cable
2869 . .
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
2869 01
Metallic
Black
2869 10
Metallic
Grey
2869 15
Blue
2869 22
White
Technical data
2867 . .
2869 . .
Temperature:
max. 180 °C
min. 65 °C, max. 180 °C
Temperature with spot heating jet:
max. 250 °C
max. 250 °C
Temperature control:
no
adjustable
Power:
215 W
250 W
Voltage:
230 V
230 V
Size (w x h x d):
100 x 250 x 160 mm
100 x 250 x 160 mm
Weight:
1.3 kg
1.7 kg
A
23
A
24
Fata Up Plus Frame Heater
• Very light, quiet and with temperature control
• Including spot heating jet
2878 00
Technical data
Temperature:
0–150 °C
Power:
350 W
Voltage:
230 V, 50 Hz
Size (w x h x d):
152 x 180 x 322 mm
Weight:
1.9 kg
60 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Fata Up Frame Heater (without illustration)
• Very light, quiet and without temperature control
• Including spot heating jet
2878 10
Technical data
Temperature:
max.150 °C
Power:
350 W
Voltage:
230 V, 50 Hz
Size (w x h x d):
152 x 180 x 322 mm
Weight:
1.9 kg
60 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Frame Heater Zita Plus
•
•
•
•
•
With constant electronic temperature control
Adjustable
Distance between the air jets: 35 mm
Including spot heating jet
Metal housing
2875 00
Technical data
Temperature level I:
75 °C
Temperature level II:
150 °C
Power:
900 W
Voltage:
230 V, 50 Hz
Size (w x h x d):
144 x 213 x 200 mm
Weight:
1.46 kg
60 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Frame Heater Maga S
•
•
•
•
•
Very strong laboratory heater with heat from both sides
Two electronically controlled temperature settings.
Distance between the air jets: 45 mm
Including spot heating jet
Metal housing
2876 00
Technical data
Temperature level I:
75 °C
Temperature level II:
150 °C
Power:
1,500 W
Voltage:
230 V, 50 Hz
Size (w x h x d):
305 x 220 x 210 mm
Weight:
3 kg
60 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
VENTILETTE Model 3
•
•
•
•
•
•
With plastic cup Ø 80 mm, slit width 30 mm
Casing and stand are made of aluminium
Motor on rubber support for quieter running
Universal motor for alternating current (AC) and direct current (DC)
Extremely long carbon brushes increase service life span of motor
With hot and cold switch
2861 22
Ivory
VENTILETTE Model 3, Electronic
• Same as No. 2861 22, however with adjustable temperature level.
2861 42
Ivory
Technical data
2861 22
Temperature level:
max. 160 °C
2861 42
40 to 250 °C
(adjustable)
Power:
450 W
800 W
Voltage:
230 V
230 V
Size (w x h x d):
275 x 135 x 145 (Ø stand) mm
275 x 135 x 145 (Ø stand) mm
Weight:
1.3 kg
1.6 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
A
25
A
26
The original from Japan is really unique:
With high quality materials like brass bushing and quality bearings, a fully developed motor technology and perfectly manufactured.
For professional use, for high reliability, for better results than ever before.
Key reasons for us to recommend this high quality machine.
Takubomatic Lens Groover
• Large, specially supported guide rollers enable grooving
of even difficult lens shapes
• Stepless adjustable groove depth
• Grooving parallel to rear face possible
• 4 different grooving types to choose from
– Controlled grooving parallel to front or back surface
– Free wheel grooving
– Manual controlled grooving
• No adaption on lens curvature necessary
• With an easy change it’s possible to make a lenti cut by
using No. 2893 20
• Including standard groove wheels (0.55 mm) and half
eye frame adaptor
2894 00 N
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
• Replacement grooving wheel available in 3 sizes:
No. 2893 01 = 0.55 mm, No. 2893 18 = 1.05 mm,
No. 2894 03 = 1.23 mm
• Additional small grooving wheel for polycarbonate available:
No. 2894 58 = 0.55 mm
• Suitable cover to No. 2894 03 and 2893 18: No. 2894 04N
A
27
Large, especially supported guide rollers enable grooving of even
difficult shapes
Durable ball bearing due to splash water protection
Soft silicone chuck pads ensure a secure grip of the lenses and an
even distribution of pressure when clamping them
Both lens guides are fitted with plastic rollers each of which can be finely
adjusted to ensure the precise position above the grooving wheel
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
170 x 160 x 210 mm
Groove depth:
0 to 0.7 mm
Groove width:
0.55 mm
Thickness of lenses:
(min.) 1.5 mm to (max.) 11 mm
Lens dia.:
(min.) 25 mm to (max.) 70 mm
Grooving time:
approx. 40 sec/lens
Voltage:
230 V, 50 Hz
Power:
57/55 W
Weight:
2.7 kg
A
28
Lens Groover
•
•
•
•
Large guide rollers enable grooving of even difficult lens shapes
Adjustable groove depth
Grooving parallel to rear face possible
4 different grooving types to choose from
– Controlled grooving parallel to front or back surface
– Free wheel grooving
– Manual controlled grooving
• No adaption on lens curvature necessary
• Including standard groove wheels (0.55 mm)
2899 00 N
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
170 x 152 x 220 mm
Groove depth:
0 to 0.7 mm
Groove width:
0.55 mm
Lens thickness:
1.5 to max. 11 mm
Min. lens size for a
rectangular flat shape
with rounded corners:
22 x 56 mm
Grooving
time:
approx. 40 sec/lens
Voltage:
220 V, 50 Hz
Power:
100 W
Weight:
2.9 kg
12 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
A
29
Consumables and Accessories for Lens Groovers
Details of the differences:
The grooving wheels made in France offer a very long tool life due to a special sintered diamond coating. The centred axis support guarantees
a precise rotation. With this equipment the B & S lens groover will do a perfect job for you. A worthwhile investment.
Diamond Grooving Wheel
•
•
•
•
Especially for polycarbonate, with notches
For groove wide: 0.55 mm
Outer diameter: 25 mm
For No. 2894 00, 2894 00 N,
2898 00, 2899 00 and 2899 00 N
• For groove wide: 0.55 mm
• Outer diameter: 25 mm
• For No. 2894 00, 2894 00 N,
2898 00, 2899 00 and 2899 00 N
2894 58
2893 01
• For groove wide: 1.05 mm
• Outer diameter: 25 mm
• For No. 2894 00, 2894 00 N,
2898 00, 2899 00 and 2899 00 N
• For groove wide: 1.23 mm
• Outer diameter: 25 mm
• For No. 2894 00, 2894 00 N,
2898 00, 2899 00 and 2899 00 N
2893 18
2894 03
Diamond Grooving Wheel
Half-Eye Frames Adapter
• For groove wide: 0.55 mm
• Outer diameter: 25 mm
• For No. 2894 00, 2894 00 N, 2898 00,
2899 00 and 2899 00 N
• For No. 2894 00 and 2894 00 N
2898 33
2893 15
Adapter Set for Lenti Grooving
for 2894 00 N
Diamond Wheel
• Consists of diamond wheel No. 2893 21
and support table No. 2893 25
• Possible rim reduction: 2 mm
• For No. 2894 00 and 2894 00 N
2893 20
230 g
1 pair
• For lenti grooving
• Spare part for adapter set No. 2893 20
2893 21
A
30
Hand Edger
•
•
•
•
•
Rough and fine surfaces with V-bevel
Contact free operation through an infra-red sensor
Compact and robust plastic housing
Switch to change the direction of rotation
30 mm width diamond wheel with V-bevel
2928 10
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
225 x 275 x 360 mm
Capacity:
150 W
Speed:
2.000 rpm
Voltage:
220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Measurement of diamond wheel:
Ø 100 mm, width 35 mm
Weight:
7.5 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Hand Edger
•
•
•
•
Rough and fine surfaces with V-bevel
Compact and robust plastic housing
Switch to change the direction of rotation
30 mm width diamond wheel with V-bevel
2928 00
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
225 x 275 x 360 mm
Capacity:
150 W
Voltage:
220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Measurement of diamond wheel:
Ø 100 mm, width 35 mm
Thickness of graining layer:
2 mm
Weight:
7.5 kg
12 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
A
31
The original made in Japan
The classic hand edger with long durability and especially high graining layer thickness. The high-quality diamond wheels are manufactured
with precision to ensure a uniform smoothness. A reliable helper in your workshop!
Takubomatic Hand Edger
in 3 Versions
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
• Direction switch to change the direction of rotation
• High quality diamond wheel, 30 mm width,
available in different versions, especially long lasting
220 x 280 x 360 mm
Capacity:
80 W
Voltage:
230 V
Measurement of
Ø 100 mm,
diamond wheel:
width from 30 to 32 mm
Thickness of
graining layer:
1.2 mm
Weight:
8 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Water tank
Water valve
Diamond wheel
Sponge holder
On- and off-switch
Diamond Hand Edger
Diamond Hand Edger
Diamond Hand Edger
With diamond wheel
Finishing wheel with shoulder
With diamond wheel
Finishing wheel with V-bevel and
shoulder
With diamond wheel
With V-bevel, rough and fine surfaces
2922 00
2923 00
2925 00
fine
fine
V-bevel
V-bevel
fine
rough
A
32
The “work horse” in a new design
We searched for a long time before we found this polishing motor “Made in Germany” which meets all our requirements: strong
torque and variable speed control during clockwise and anti-clockwise rotation. Special features: low speed for easy polishing of delicate
materials such as polycarbonate. An optional flexible shaft extends the range of applications. You can rely on this all-rounder made
in Germany if you want to polish efficiently and effectively.
Including polishing tips!
B & S Polishing Motor with Clockwise
and Anti-clockwise Rotation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Frequency-controlled three-phase motor
Clockwise and Anti-clockwise rotation
Low maintenance ball bearings
Low noise
300 W
Designed for continuous operation
Including left and right polishing tip
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
250 x 170 x 172 mm
Height of spindle:
111 mm
Voltage/Frequency:
230 V/50 Hz
No-load speed:
0 up to 6,000 rpm (variable speed)
Power:
0.3 kW
Weight:
11 kg
36 month warranty!
2967 00
Spare Tips for the Polishing Machines No. 2966 00 and 2967 00
Polishing Tip, left
Polishing Tip, right
With right hand thread.
With left hand thread.
2966 22
2966 23
14 mm (Bore)
approx. 115 mm
10 mm (Bore)
approx. 115 mm
Please consider before ordering: Lever in right hand run position (clockwise wheel rotation): left: polishing tip No. 2966 22 right: polishing tip No. 2966 23
Polishing Motor
• Strong polishing motor designed for
continuous operation
• Operating controls easy accessible
• Low noise
• Incl. one polishing tip and one flange
2964 00
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
360 x 260 x 210 mm
Voltage/Frequency:
230 V/50 Hz
Speed:
1,400 and 2,800 rpm
Power:
400 W
Weight:
10 kg
36 month warranty!
Universal Dust Collector
for right and left
• Metal casing with removable plastic tray
2968 20
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
185 x 280 x 270 mm
Weight:
2.75 kg
Polishing Motor
• With two conical tips (right/left thread)
and one wheel adapter
• Two different speed settings
• Not designed for continuous use
(max. 20 minutes)
2968 00
Technical data
Voltage:
230 V
Power:
300 W
Speed:
1,400 and 2,800 rpm
Size (w x h x d):
250 x 300 x 150 mm
Weight:
5.5 kg
36 month warranty!
Polishing wheels and polish for the polishing motors can be found on the pages E 34 to E 37.
A
33
A
34
Drilling Machine
For drilling and milling
• Comfortable drilling machine for rimless frames
• Easy and quick capture of the drill hole coordinates by using
the previous lenses or demo lenses
• Memorizing of drill hole coordinates of the current scanned frame
• The saved drill holes will be automatically approached by
the drill head, no adjustment of the coordinates needed
• Good drilling results in a very short time
Including:
• Marking aid for lenses 2889 01
• 7 drills (1.0; 1.2; 1.4; 1.5; 1.6; 1.7; 2.0)
• 3 millers (0.8; 1.2; 1.4)
• Drill-miller set 2035 50
2890 20
A
35
Technical data
Measures (w x h x d):
300 x 225 x 270 mm
Speed:
0 up to 3,000 rpm
Voltage:
240 V / 50/60 Hz
Power:
50 W
Weight
5 kg
12 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Drilling Centre
A
36
Drilling, milling and grooving – all demands for stylish rimless frames are
easily met with this very reasonably priced drilling centre.
• Drill, mill and groove accurately while both lenses blocked side by side
• Can be used as a stand or hand drill
• Compact easy to use cross table
• Storage for drills, millers and small parts
• Cross table with millimeter scale, separately available: No. 2191 11
• Lens angle changeable to minimise adjustments after frame assembly
• Inclination adjustable through dial
2191 06
Including WECO blocker Take-up (can also be used without blockers)
2191 06-NIDEK
Including NIDEK blocker Take-up
Technical data
Size without transformer
(w x h x d):
280 x 400 x 330 mm
Speed:
5,000 to 20,000 rpm
(adjustable)
Power:
60 W
Operating voltage:
12 V
Primary connection:
for 220 to 240 V
Chuck:
0.5 to 3.2 mm
Cross table surface:
200 x 70 mm
Adjusting range
for cross table:
X (diagonal) 134 mm, Y (deep) 46 mm
Weight:
2.8 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Accessories
For blocker Take-up and spare parts
contact your local distributor.
Lens Drilling Device for
WECO Toothed Blocks
Lens Drilling Device for NIDEK
Toothed Blocks (without illustration)
Suitable for Xenox and Proxxon cross tables.
Complete with WECO blocker Take-up.
Suitable for Xenox and Proxxon cross tables.
Complete with NIDEK blocker Take-up.
2891 64
2891 64-NIDEK
Proxxon Drilling Stand
•
•
•
•
Sensitive feed through steering wheel and roller bearings
Solid, chrome steel pillar (Ø 20 mm, 280 mm long)
The handpiece collet can be tilted to both sides in 90°
Weight: 2 kg
Drilling machine No. 2886 61 and vice No. 2887 21 are not included.
2128 60
36 month warranty!
Table Drilling Machine Xenox
Practical drill depth indication
with adjustable knob
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Precision measurements due to depth perceptions scale
Fixed knob with scale
Transmission belt drive
Very quiet running
Incl. machine vice No. 2887 21
Incl. drill chuck No. 2887 11
6 steel clamps for shaft size from 0.8 to 3.2 mm
Accessories: Base plate No. 2887 14, lens drilling device
No. 2129 00 and locating bush No. 2887 12
2887 50
Identical with No. 2887 50, however without accessories.
2887 20
Technical data
Dimensions (w x h x d):
120 x 330 x 220 mm
Rated voltage:
230 V
Power rating:
85 W
Speed:
1,800 and 4,700 and 8,500 rpm
(change by adjusting the belt)
Weight:
5.7 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Machine Vice
For table drilling machine No. 2887 20 and drill stand No. 2128 70.
2887 21
A
37
A
38
Xenox Hand Drilling Machine
with Ergonomic Hand Piece
Hand piece in ergonomic design and a balanced weight enables
pen and fist positioning.
• Strong, quiet and vibration free motor without overheating
in permanent use
• Quick tool change
• Stainless steel hand piece, easy to clean
• Foot pedal is available as accessory (No. 2888 01)
• Delivered without accessories
Does not include pictured grinding wheels or polishing wheels.
2888 00
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Technical data
Speed:
0 up to 35,000 rpm with R/L operation
Voltage:
230 V
Frequency:
50/60 Hz
Power:
65 W
Power input:
max. 0.3 A
Size (w x h x d):
150 x 130 x 80 mm (control unit)
Weight:
1.45 kg
Weight of hand piece without cable:
180 g
Length of the cable:
180 cm (helix cable)
Drill chuck:
2.35 mm (high concentricity)
Diameter at the handle:
approx. 15 mm
Xenox Drilling and Milling Unit
Incl. 6 chucks with 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 2.4; 3.0 and 3.2 mm diameter and
drill chuck No. 2886 64.
Does not include pictured grinding wheels or polishing wheels.
2886 61
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
240 x 90 x 240 mm
Voltage:
230 V
Power:
60 W
Speed:
5,000 to 20,000 rpm
Weight:
2.9 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Hand Drilling Machine with Transformer
Incl. 6 chucks with 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 2.4; 3.0 and 3.2 mm diameter.
2886 60
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
140 x 80 x 240 mm
Voltage:
230 V
Power:
60 W
Speed:
5,000 to 20,000 rpm
(adjustable)
Weight:
2.9 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Accessories
Screw Wizard
The revolutionary solution to level cut screws
on rimless frames. No more filing or milling.
Just use our Proxxon hand drill No. 2886 60
with the high quality diamond miller No. 2264 00
plus the B & S screw wizard No. 2886 70 and
away you go.
2886 70
Diamond Miller
Screw Wizard Complete Set
The diamond miller runs in the protective plastic
cap. The screw wizard prevents scratches on
the lenses caused by accidental slips.
•
•
•
•
2264 00
2886 80
2886 60 Hand Drilling Machine with Transformer
2886 65 Union Nut
2886 70 Screw Wizard
2264 00 Diamond Miller
A
39
A
40
A
41
Hot quality
The AQUARIUS Hydrozon soldering unit is manufactured by a small company in Germany under full compliance with the most demanding
quality standards. The best unit we have found. Hydrozon soldering technology minimises harmful oxidation during the soldering process and
offers a material saving repair. The environmentally-friendly technology can be used for years almost without the need for any consumables, making it very cost-effective in the long term. We guarantee repair and spare parts service for many years.
AQUARIUS Welding and
Soldering Unit
•
•
•
•
Integrated flux container
Optical display of push button function via LED
Designed for continuous use
Precise regulation of flame is possible by using
different size jets and a small knurling wheel
• Safety pressure control function and backfire
control valve built into the handpiece and the
hose connection
• Ready to use
• Accessories included (1 each):
Holder for soldering hand piece No. 2845
00, soldering hand piece No. 2846 00, float
levels No. 2847 00 and 2847 01, electrolyte
No. 3198 00 and flux No. 3199 01
No. 3199 01
2839 60
AQUARIUS Welding and
Soldering Unit
• Like No. 2839 60, but with max. gas power
of 50 l/h
• 2 workstations may be run simultaneously
• Accessories included (1 each):
Holder for soldering hand piece No. 2845
00, soldering hand piece No. 2846 00, float
levels No. 2847 00 and 2847 01, sets of jets
No. 2840 50, electrolyte No. 3198 00 and
flux No. 3199 01
2839 00
42 month warranty and 20 years spare parts warranty!
Technical data
2839 60
Power:
230 V, 50 Hz
2839 00
230 V, 50 Hz
Current:
0.9 A
1.0 A
Rated current:
200 VA
250 VA
Maximum gas capacity:
45 l/h
50 l/h
Water consumption:
16 g/h
28 g/h
Flux consumption:
6 g/h
8 g/h
Biggest applicable jet:
20 G (0.9 mm)
19 G (1.0 mm)
workstations:
1
2
Pressure control
Push button and
Push button and
and
safety pressure
safety pressure
regulation:
control function
control function
DC control:
LEC
LEC
Generator capacity:
0.8 l electrolyte
0.8 l electrolyte
Booster capacity:
0.1 l flux
0.1 l flux
Float
Float
Float
Float
attachments (w x h x d):
450 x 280 x 220 mm
450 x 280 x 220 mm
Operation weight:
14 kg
17 kg
Number of possible
Generator
level control:
Booster
level control:
Size of machine without
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Micro-Torch II+ Complete Set
with Central Dosing Valve
A
42
• Practical soldering device, efficient and space saving
• With central dosing valve for flame regulation that greatly reduces
oxygen and gas consumption
• Ready for use
• Accessories included:
2 oxygen bottles No. 2760 02, hand piece No. 2761 01, gas cartridge
No. 2761 06, Triox adapter with dosing valve No. 2762 06 and single
jets No. 2840 06, 2840 08, 2840 10 and 2840 13
2762 05
Technical data
Due to legal requirements gas
and oxygen will be delivered in
separate packaging.
Applicable jets:
0.6 to 1.2 mm
Max. working temperature:
2,700 °C
Burning duration of set of bottles:
approx. 1.5 h
according to jet size
Weight:
1.73 kg
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Micro Soldering Unit, Type B.P.
• Small and handy unit
• Special jet with air supply provides a small, pointed and 1,600 °C
hot flame
• Ready for use, delivery with 1 bottle No. 2761 06
• Weight: 160 g
2763 00
The classic “Made in Germany”
Reliable for decades and almost unchanged. A solid help with a steady hand.
Soldering Station
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ideal for holding broken spectacle frames when soldering.
Two adjustable clamps, vertically and horizontally movable
Mounting of a “Third Hand” possible
Baseplate heat resistant
Size of baseplate (w x d): 295 x 210 mm
Weight: 2.1 kg
2757 00
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Soldering Station with small Base Plate
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ideal for fixing workpieces
With 3 adjustable clamps
Clamps vertically and horizontally adjustable and lockable
Small space-saving base plate
Fixing facility for one additional clamp on the base plate
Dimensions of the base plate (w x d): 100 x 100 mm
Weight: 1.4 kg
Material: chromed brass and stainless steel
2757 20
Accessories for AQUARIUS Soldering and Welding Units
Set of Jets
Electrolyte
Flux
3198 00
3199 01
A
43
5 pieces assorted.
Jet dia.: 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9 and 1.0 mm
2840 50
800 ml
1,000 ml
Accessories for the Soldering Unit No. 2762 05 and for AQUARIUS Soldering
and Welding Units
Single Jets
2840 . .
Gauge*
Description
Jet Ø
Opening Ø
Order No.
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
0.5 mm
0.6 mm
0.7 mm
0.8 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
2840 05
2840 06
2840 07
2840 08
2840 09
2840 10
2840 13
Reamers for Jets
With plastic handle, for cleaning of blocked jets.
Reamers-Ø: 0.05; 0.08; 0.10; 0.15; 0.20; 0.25; 0.30; 0.35; 0.40; 0.45;
0.50 and 0.55 mm
2840 20
12 = 1 set
* Gauge refers to a unit of measurement which is used to measure the size of small
tubes. The higher the gauge the smaller is the external diameter of the small tube.
Accessories for Soldering and Welding Units No. 2727 30, 2762 05, 2763 00
and 2762 00 (discontinued)
This is not liquid gas. The bottle
lasts for approx. 45 minutes.
Due to legal requirements gas
and oxygen will be delivered in
separate packaging.
Gas Cartridge
Gas Cartridge
Oxygen Bottle
For handheld soldering unit
No. 2763 00 and Micro Torch
Set No. 2762 05 and 2762 00
(discontinued).
Contents: 70 ml liquid gas
Burning duration: approx. 3.5 h
For use with hand held solder
unit No. 2727 30.
Contents: 400 ml butane gas
For Micro Torch Set
No. 2762 05 and 2762 00
(discontinued).
With 13 g oxygen gas
(no liquid gas).
2761 06
2737 01
2760 02
A
44
The B & S polariscope
“Made in Germany” quality. Its outstanding characteristics are ease of use and functional reliability. The tilted alignment of the polarisation filter
makes identifying the stress fields in the lens area both simple and easy. A large test area and good ergonomic qualities make it an optimum aid
in the workshop and in the sales area.
Polariscope
• With illumination via push-button
• Automatic shut-off after approx. 15 sec
2384 22
Bulb, 25 W
Technical data
Size of test area:
68 x 68 mm
Distance between
polarised fields:
50 mm
Timer:
approx. 15 sec illumination
Power:
230 V
Size (w x h x d):
130 x 130 x 175 mm
Weight:
700 g
For No. 2384 22.
2384 55
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
A
B
GFC Polariscope with Adjustable Inclination of the Unit
A
45
• Comfortable use because of adjustable
inclination of the unit
• Suitable for spectacles with high lens curves
• Extra large distance between the test fields
• With lighting inside the metal housing
Lens without hardcoating
2397 22
Technical data
Size of polarising fields:
A) 58 x 58 mm
B) 75 x 75 mm
Distance between
polarising filters:
95 mm
Voltage:
230 V
Size (w x h x d):
135 x 165 x 150 mm
Weight:
700 g
Lens with hardcoating
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Hand Polariscope
With power saving LED, battery, made of plastic
and metal. With a push-button to switch on.
2393 20
Technical data
Size of
polarising field:
40 x 40 mm
Distance between
polarising filters:
25 mm
Power:
9-V-Block (Typ PP3)
Size (w x h x d):
100 x 55 x 48 mm
Weight:
180 g
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
GFC UV Test Lamp
To demonstrate photochromatic lenses
to customers.
2399 00
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
220 x 125 x 120 mm
Voltage:
230 V
Fuse:
0.5 A
Weight:
1.75 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
UV Demonstration Box
for UV Test Lamp
To demonstrate the UV protection
of lenses. Only use in addition with the
UV test lamp.
2399 05
To control the UV-filter with a transparent lens
90 x 55 x 120 mm
200 g
A
46
Visualize Progressive Marking Reader
Q-Check Testing Unit
• To visualize progressive markings on the back and front
surface of lenses
• Small, compact and battery-operated
• With automatic switch-off
• Batteries 4 x 1.5 V (type AA) included
• Suitable power supply: 2450 01
Q-Check allows a precise inspection of mounted and already worn
spectacles. The compact unit combines the following functions:
• Checking of centring lines
• Lens engraving / marking on lenses
• Polariscope
• Surface inspection
2450 00
2460 00
90 x 150 x 220 mm
85 g
Technical data
24 month warranty!
Power:
230 V/50 Hz
Size (w x h x d):
125 x 190 x 220 mm
Weight:
ca. 1.3 kg
Handy Transmission Device “Made in Germany”
A compact, German high tech product which is easy to use and offers guaranteed reliability when presenting the results of measurements.
The OptiScan simultaneously measures the transmission of UV and visible light. Results are shown in terms of percentages. The device
is independent of mains power supply and can be used for customer demos anywhere in the sales area.
OptiScan
• Device for measuring the transmittance of spectacle lenses in
the visible and UV-light range
• Verification of both single lenses and complete spectacles is
possible
• It is especially designed for customer demonstration
• Small, compact & battery-operated
2411 00
Technical data
Measuring range:
VIS: 400–700 nm, UV: 320–400 nm
Power:
9 V battery (type PP3)
Size (w x h x d):
110 x 130 x 120 mm
Weight:
860 g
24 month warranty!
A
47
2430 20
3184 10
3184 09
Supplied without
application bottle
UV-Gel
UV Lamps for UV Light Curing Adhesives
Use for filling in drill holes accidentally drilled too large or incorrectly.
The gel cures firmly when exposed to the UV lamp.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Glue cures through UV rays
To use for fitting rimless frames
Transparent, dries very hard
Glue can be drilled once completely hardened
To activate all UV curing glues
UV protection for the user
Continuous operation and time setting 120 sec (with No. 2430 20)
No. 2430 20 with extendable worktop
Large exposure field
2430 20
2420 10
Technical data
2430 20
Size (w x h x d):
200 x 100 x 340 mm
2420 10
270 x 80 x 130 mm
Capacity:
36 W (4 x 9 W)
9W
Weight:
1.7 kg
770 g
24 month warranty!
UV Gel Applicator
• Perfect for delicate fittings
• Handy, convenient
• No air bubbles in the cannula
3184 03
UV Gel Application
Bottle
• Convenient application bottle
• Reclosable
• With application tip for precise
dispensing
3184 10
3 ml
Bulb for the UV Lamp for Adhesives
Spare bulb for No. 2430 00, 2420 00, 2430 20 and 2420 10.
Capacity: 9 W
2420 01
10 ml
UV Gel Inverted Holder
2420 10
• UV glue is always ready for use and can be used up to the last drop
• No air bubbles in the cannula
• Stable and perfect for immediate use
3184 09
40 x 65 x 50 mm
66 g
3184 03
Conical shape for
easier dispensing
A
48
Tinting Unit Tinta 2 for 2 Pots
•
•
•
•
This unit is designed to heat tinting solutions to dye uncoated organic lenses
With adjustable temperature and clock timer
Perfect to use with B & S Dye powder 2615 00–2615 26
Including 2 stainless steel pots and one stainless steel lens holder
2880 01
Technical data
Size (w x h x d):
160 x 220 x 430 mm
Power:
max. 4.5 A
Voltage:
230 V, 50 Hz
Weight:
4.2 kg
36 month warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Lens Dye Packets
• Water soluble dye powder for tinting lenses
• Ready prepared for 1 litre tinting solution
• The powder bag dissolves completely when
mixed with hot water
• Content: 10 g
2615 . .
UV Filter Additive
•
•
•
•
•
Water soluble powder
To apply an UV filter on lenses
UV protection up to 400 nm
Ready prepared for 0.5 litre tinting solution
The powder bag dissolves completely when mixed
with hot water
• Content: 35 g
2616 00
Heat Transfer Fluid
•
•
•
•
Special oil, can be used instead of distilled water
No loss of liquid by evaporation
Especially suitable for frequent use
Content: 1 l
2617 00
Neutraliser
• Removes colour from tinted lenses
• Content: 1 l
2618 00
You will find Dyes for the Tinting Unit on page E 22 and E 23.
A
49
A
50
The B & S Clavulus, proven quality from Germany.
The CLAVULUS has been produced exclusively for B & S by more than three generations of the same precision engineering company in the
Black Forest. With this classic piece of equipment many tasks which involve spectacles can still be carried out simply and dependably. The
craft precision used in its manufacture and our satisfied users have kept the CLAVULUS in the B & S product range for more than 50 years now.
A comprehensive range of accessories extends the scope of the applications which it can be used for. Opticians for whom craftsmanship is
the focus of attention will especially appreciate its qualities.
CLAVULUS
• For quick and easy repairs
• Including add-on’s (see pic.)
• Special accessories: Peening punch, riveting punch, flaring
punch 1.5 mm, rivet puller, punch for spread hinges, single
punch, double punch and 7 anvils
2125 50
135 x 290 x 175 mm
2.5 kg
The Original with
30 years warranty!
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Accessories for CLAVULUS
Bending Device for
Bridge Narrowing
With wide and narrow cone.
Fixing Screw for Punches
and Anvils
2125 26
2147 00
Lens Drilling Device
•
• A lockable precision micrometer
screw ensures the correct distance •
between edge of lens and bore hole
centre
•
2129 00
• Incl. drilling support
No. 2129 01
Two pivots allow perfect centering
for drilling
Fits also drilling machine No.
2887 00 (discontinued)
May be used together with the adapter chuck No. 2887 12 with the
table drill No. 2887 20 and 2887 10
(discontinued) plus the drill stands
No. 2128 60 and 2128 70
Stamp
For marking spectacles
(see also page B 31).
2125 31–39
Peening Punch
Riveting Punch
Flaring Punch,
dia. 1.5 mm
Flaring Punch,
dia. 2.1 mm
2125 01
2125 02
2125 04
2125 05
Single punch
Double Punch
Anvil,
1.8 mm shaft
Miller (4.0 mm)
For Drilling of Hinge Pockets
2125 09
2125 13
2125 41
2236 40
A
51
Universal XC
• XC stands for X-tra comfort, X-tra coverage, X-tra control
• Perfect fit through easily adjustable temple and comfort bridge
• Lenses with hard and anti-fog coating
• Replacement lenses
• Temples adjustable in length and inclination
Lens: polycarbonate, transparent
9407 00 Blue
140 mm
57 mm
12 mm
100–
113 mm
36 g
9407 01 Spare lens transparent
Metal clip, glazeable from + 4.00 up to
– 4.00 dpt. with cyl. 2.00 dpt.
•
•
•
•
Suitable for Universal XC no. 9407 00 and 9407 10
Easy fitting with a secure fixation
Flexible metal frame
Including cloth bag
9407 05
46 mm
33 mm
20 mm
5.5 g
This clip in is glazeable with all kinds of lens materials and from any
optician, because the certified safety goggle remains unchanged.
The complete range of safety eyewear is included in our current accessories catalogue.
B
Pliers
B2
B4
B6
B7
B9
B 10
B 14
B 17
B 19
B 22
B 26
B 30
B 31
B 32
B 36
B 39
Parallel Pliers
Overview: eLite-, Standard Pliers
Inclination Pliers
Holding Pliers
Nylon Eyewire Pliers
Tips & Tricks: Bending Pliers
Flat Nose Pliers
Nose Pad Adjusting Pliers
Peening Pliers
Tips & Tricks: Rimless Frame Pliers
Special Pliers
De-Blocking Pliers
Marking Pliers
Cutters
Tips & Tricks: Spring Hinge Pliers
Storage for Pliers
150 mm
B
2
Parallel Pliers –
An Innovation at B&S
• Parallel Jaws
Secure grip due to a parallel jaws position
in every situation.
100 mm
• Long Plier Handles
Optimum leverage with minimum use
of force.
• Plastic Jaws “Made in Germany”
Naturally the highest quality plastic
jaws for extra durability.
50 mm
0 mm
Available from
05/2014
Parallel Holding Pliers 8 mm
With two plastic jaws. Self-opening by spring mechanism.
1551 00 P
140 mm
135 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
1551 01
1 pair
B
3
Available from
05/2014
Available from
05/2014
Parallel Inclination Pliers 8 mm
Parallel Pressure Mount Pliers
One jaw side fitted with plastic to bend metal hinges without
leaving any marks. Self-opening by spring mechanism.
For pressing in the plastic sleeves on rimless frames of type Silhouette
“Minimal Art” or similar models. Self-opening by spring mechanism.
1558 00 P
1511 00 P
140 mm
135 g
140 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaw:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1558 01
1511 01
1 pair
B&S Pliers* – decades of experience in your hand
B
4
• Unique design
Developed by B&S, functional and protected worldwide.
• 10 years warranty
(except cutting pliers and eLite spring hinge plier no. 1514 . . )
Solid and durable.
• Reliable quality
Forged joint, precise manufacturing, highly durable plastic jaws.
Professional protection whilst adjusting
frames (see page E 18–E 20).
* Not suitable for medical applications
Standard Pliers –
proven a million times over
• Robust design
Ideal for people who prefer working with heavier tools.
• Long handles
For optimum leverage with a minimum use of force.
• Textured surface
Provides a safe grip, prevents slipping.
eLite Pliers –
the ultra-light alternative
• Handy size
Also suitable for smaller hands.
• Lighter
Light pliers for less effort.
• Very secure grip
Asymmetrical ends and textured grip to prevent slipping.
B
5
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
6
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
eLite
0 mm
Inclination Pliers – conical 8 mm
Inclination Pliers – conical 6 mm
To adjust metal hinges, one side with nylon jaw,
conical jaw: Ø 6:1,5 mm.
To adjust metal hinges, for delicate frames, one side with extremely
thin flat nylon jaw, conical jaw: Ø 6:1,5 mm.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1558 00 N
1558 50
1558 10 N
1558 55
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
150 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaw:
Replacement plastic jaw:
1558 01
1558 02
148 mm
100 g
B
7
eLite
Inclination Pliers – Cylindrical 8 mm
Holding Pliers 10 mm
Especially designed for nylon frames, extremely thin cylindrical
metal pin, other jaw is covered with nylon.
With plastic jaws, jaw mouth remains in parallel position
up to approx. 3 mm.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
1596 00 N
1596 50
1553 00 N
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
150 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaw:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1596 01
1553 01
1 pair
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
8
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
eLite
0 mm
Holding Pliers 8 mm
Holding Pliers 6 mm
With plastic jaws.
With plastic jaws, mouth remains in parallel position
at a gap of approx. 3 mm.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1551 00 N
1551 50
1565 00 N
1565 50
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
150 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1551 01
1565 01
1 pair
1 pair
148 mm
100 g
B
9
eLite
Nylon Eyewire Shaper 24 mm
Nylon Eyewire Shaper 19 mm
With plastic jaws, large version.
With plastic jaws, small version.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
1507 00 N
1507 50
1509 00 N
150 mm
140 g
145 mm
110 g
145 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1507 01
1509 01
1 pair
1 pair
Tips & Tricks
Bending Plier
with 3 Rollers
B
10
One Plier
for Many
Applications!
Bending Pliers with 3 Rollers
No. 1566 00 N, 1566 50
approx. 1–2 minutes
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
This is how it works
To adjust the …
… temples
B
11
1
Adapt to the shape of the head.
… eyewire
2
To form the eyewire.
… bridge
3
eLite
Adjusting the bridge.
… temple ends
4
Bending the temple ends.
Bending Pliers with 3 rollers
For various purposes: to adjust spectacles, bridges, temples and
temple tips.
… lens shape
Standard:
eLite:
1566 00 N
1566 50
150 mm
140 g
5
To change the lens shape.
Replacement plastic jaws:
1566 01
1 pair
148 mm
95 g
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
12
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
0 mm
Available from
05/2014
Nylon Eyewire Shaper
Nylon Eyewire Shaper 15 mm
One plastic jaw (19 mm), one plastic jaw (7 mm).
Perfect to adjust bridges.
One plastic jaw (15 mm), one plastic jaw (12 mm).
Perfect to adjust bridges.
Standard:
Standard:
eLite:
1506 00 N
1584 00 N
1584 50
145 mm
140 g
145 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1506 01
1584 01
1 pair
1 pair
137 mm
100 g
B
13
eLite
eLite
Trident Pliers
Bending Pliers
For precise and easy adjustment of clip-on bridges.
Based on the trident pliers concept. This plier is particularly suitable for a
careful adjustment of softer materials. The plastic jaw prevents scratches.
The conical pin can be cushioned with shrinking tube.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1513 00 N
1513 50
1544 00 N
1544 50
140 mm
140 g
137 mm
100 g
140 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaw:
1544 01
137 mm
90 g
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
B
14
eLite
eLite
Flat Snipe Nose Pliers – Extra Long
Flat Snipe Nose Pliers
Flat inner jaws. Extra long and thin version.
Semi-circular jaws.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1564 00 N
1564 50
1515 00 N
1515 50
155 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
150 mm
B
15
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
0 mm
Round Snipe Nose Pliers
Flat Semicircular Snipe Nose Pliers
Round jaws.
One round jaw, one semi-circular jaw.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
1501 00 N
1501 50
1517 00 N
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
150 mm
140 g
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
16
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
0 mm
Flat Nose Pliers 5 mm
Flat Nose Pliers 3 mm
5 mm width at tip.
3 mm width at tip.
Standard:
Standard:
eLite:
1523 00 N
1522 00 N
1522 50
150 mm
140 g
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
95 g
B
17
eLite
eLite
Nose Pad Adjusting Pliers –
Push-in Nose Pads
Nose Pad Adjusting Pliers –
Screw-in Nose Pads
Especially for fitting push-in nose pads. Very delicate
version to avoid touching the lens during fitting.
For screw-in nose pads. Improved, a more delicate
version to avoid touching the lens during fitting.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1549 00 N
1549 50
1546 00 N
1546 50
150 mm
140 g
147 mm
95 g
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
95 g
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
18
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
eLite
0 mm
Nose Pad Removing Pliers
Size Testing Pliers
For removal of “push-in-type nose pads”.
For testing lens size during the finishing process.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1502 00 N
1502 50
1542 00 N
1542 50
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
100 g
145 mm
140 g
139 mm
95 g
B
19
eLite
Peening Pliers
Screw Cutter
With screw on peening tip and point shaped sunken anvil to avoid
marking the frame.
For cutting German Silver and brass screws on rimless frames.
Not suitable for steel screws.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
1527 10 N
1527 50
1578 00 N
150 mm
140 g
Replacement peening tips:
1537 02
3 pieces
140 mm
95 g
130 mm
125 g
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
B
20
eLite
Special Front Cutter for Plastic Sleeves
Special Side Cutter for Plastic
For cutting plastic sleeves on frames such as “Minimal Art” from
Silhouette. The narrow shape of the jaws and the filigree cutting edges
reduce the danger of scratching the lenses. Not suitable for metal.
For cutting nylon liner near a drilled hole. The narrow shape of the jaws
and the filigree cutting edges reduce the risk of scratching the lenses.
Not suitable for metal.
Standard:
eLite:
eLite:
1569 00 N
1569 50
1583 50
140 mm
140 g
With plastic grip:
1569 00
115 mm
70 g
137 mm
95 g
100 mm
40 g
150 mm
B
21
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
eLite
0 mm
Pressing Pliers
Pressing Pliers with O-ring
For pressing in plastic sleeves on rimless frames such as Silhouette
“Minimal Art” or similar models. With vertical and horizontal groove.
For pressing in plastic sleeves on rimless frames such as Silhouette
“Minimal Art” or similar models. With horizontal groove. Comparable
to model no. 1511 00 N, but is offered with a deeper groove and
exchangeable rubber o-rings. Comes complete with 5 O-rings.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1511 00 N
1511 50
1511 10 N
1511 55
150 mm
145 g
145 mm
100 g
150 mm
145 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1511 01
1511 02
1 pair
1 pair
Replacement O-ring
1511 03
5 pieces
145 mm
100 g
Tips & Tricks
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
Pressing and
Removing Plier
for Rimless Frames
B
22
Compressing
and Removing
Sleeves is Easy
and Simple!
Pressing Plier with Rocker
No. 1567 00 N, 1567 50
Removing Plier
No. 1568 00 N, 1568 50
Lens Protection Shim Plate
with Long Holes
No. 2269 10
Special Front Cutter
for Plastic Sleeves
No. 1569 50
approx. 5 minutes
Neues Bild!
This is how it works
Compressing
Inserting
Cutting
Placing
B
23
1
Insert a sleeve.
2
Cut the sleeve to size by using the lens
protection shim plate 2269 10 and the
special front cutter 1569 50.
3
Place the frames parts.
Removing
Compressing
Cutting
Removing
4
1
2
Compress the sleeve with the pressing plier.
Even high Plus-/ Minus lenses can be easily
mounted due to the movable rocker.
Cut the bridge of the sleeve by using the lens
protection shim plate 2269 10 and the special
front cutter 1569 50.
Place the removal plier and push out the
sleeve.
Switch the jaw
Dismantling
Turning
Tighten
1
2
3
To mount vertical sleeves release the screw
of the jaw.
Turn the jaw by 180°.
Tighten the screw of the jaw.
Pressing and Removing Plier for Rimless Frames –
page B 22 and B 23
Tips & Tricks
B
24
eLite
eLite
Pressing Pliers with Rocker
Removing Pliers with Rotatable Jaws
For pressing in plastic sleeves on rimless frames such as Silhouette
“Minimal Art” or similar models. With vertical and horizontal groove and
rocker to balance the angle.
To remove plastic sleeves from the drill holes of rimless frames such as
Silhouette “Minimal Art” or similar models. Rotatable jaw with vertical and
horizontal pins.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
eLite:
1567 00 N
1567 50
1568 00 N
1568 50
150 mm
140 g
148 mm
95 g
150 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1567 01
1568 01
1 pair
1 pair
148 mm
95 g
150 mm
B
25
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
0 mm
Special Pliers for Screwless Rimless Frames
Rimless Frame Adjusting Pliers
Pliers with two notches for easy disassembly of screwless frames such
as Silhouette “Minimal Art” or similar models.
Specially for aligning rimless spectacles. Secure grip of the screws
and nuts.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
1518 00 N
1518 50
1539 00 N
140 mm
140 g
137 mm
95 g
155 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaw:
1539 01
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
26
100 mm
50 mm
eLite
0 mm
Hinge Setting or Angling Pliers
Hinge Adjusting Pliers
With two concave indentations, parallel mouth gap at 1 mm.
Width of mouth: 4.0 mm
To easily bend and adjust roll joint.
Standard:
eLite:
Standard:
1548 00 N
1548 50
1555 00 N
148 mm
140 g
137 mm
90 g
145 mm
140 g
B
27
Temple Adjusting Pliers
Temple Adjusting Pliers
One flat plastic jaw with three different grooves and one round plastic
jaw with three different curves. Ideal to adjust all types of temples. The
even distortion and constant pressure applied to the workpiece ensure
a method of working which takes special care of the material.
With two special plastic jaws, one convex and one concave,
both jaws have crossgrooves vertical to the curves.
Standard:
Standard:
1541 00 N
1530 00 N
150 mm
140 g
150 mm
140 g
Replacement plastic jaws:
Replacement plastic jaws:
1541 01
1530 01
1 pair
1 pair
B
28
Lens Aligner 32 mm
Lens Aligner 20 mm
Extra long jaws with straight ends, non-slip punched rubber discs.
Fixed rubber jaw: Ø 32 mm (punched Ø 15 mm), flexible rubber jaw:
Ø 26 mm, working clearance of jaws: 40 mm.
Same as No. 1516 01 N, but with two Ø 20 mm discs.
Spring mechanism on the handle. Especially for small frames.
Standard:
Standard:
1516 01 N
1516 20 N
200 mm
240 g
200 mm
240 g
Replacement rubber discs:
Replacement rubber discs:
1532 01
1535 20
1 pair
Replacement plate complete with spring:
1534 02
1 pair
150 mm
B
29
100 mm
50 mm
0 mm
Hinge Adjusting Pliers
Chipping Pliers
Width of mouth: 1.5 mm
With exchangeable jaws, including replacement jaws.
Standard:
Standard:
1538 00 N
1561 00 N
148 mm
140 g
145 mm
140 g
Replacement jaws:
1561 02
1 pair
eLite: smaller, lighter and with matt finish
150 mm
B
30
100 mm
50 mm
0 mm
De-Blocking Pliers
De-Blocking Pliers for NIDEK
For easy removal of lens blocks made of plastic or silicone,
application vertical.
Special pliers for de-blocking the NIDEK lens block especially for
NIDEK Mini Cup and the approved P-Cup.
Standard:
eLite:
1520 00 N
1591 50
148 mm
140 g
145 mm
125 g
Replacement jaws:
1591 01
1 pair
Mark all your spectacle frames with your company logo.
Type size is 1.5 mm, unless specified otherwise. If the frame requires a sign the proportions will be adjusted accordingly not the type. The maximum
letter size is 2.0 mm. No more than 9 letters should be used for perfect print quality.
B
31
Calculation of the stamp price
Use the order numbers below to determine the
correct code for the number of characters. For
example, if you would like to order the punch
BRO for the CLAVULUS, you will find under
No. 2125 33. This is only valid for letters that
are DIN-Norm. More complicated engravings
such as spectacle frames, a monocle, a logo or
other styles of writing and decoration, which are
different to the above example and depending
on the grade of difficulty will be subject to a
quotation.
Calculation examples for inserts
with 1.5 mm letter height:
Examples of signs:
K5
calculated as:
BRO
MEIER
Special signs such as
2 signs
3 signs
5 signs
Stamp for Marking Pliers
No. 1590 00
1590 31 1 sign
Marking Pliers
1590 32 2 signs
1590 33 3 signs
For marking spectacle frames. Inserts made to your request.
1590 34 4 signs
Stamp for CLAVULUS
No. 2125 00 (sold out) and 2125 50
Standard:
1590 00
165 mm
280 g
(see also page A 50)
2125 31 1 sign
2125 32 2 signs
2125 33 3 signs
B
32
Side Cutter
Double Joint Front Cutter
With double joint and inserted hard metal cutting blades,
used for hard wire and steel screws up to 1.4 mm diameter.
With bevelled cutting blades and double joint used for hard wire
and for steel screws up to 1.4 mm diameter.
Standard:
Standard:
1579 00 N
1579 79 N
180 mm
240 g
170 mm
240 g
150 mm
B
33
100 mm
50 mm
0 mm
Front Cutter
Side Cutter
With inserted hard metal cutting blades for stainless steel
screws up to 1.4 mm.
With inserted hard metal cutting blades for steel
wires up to 2.0 mm.
Standard:
With plastic grip:
1577 10 N
1581 00
145 mm
140 g
175 mm
200 g
150 mm
In case you use our side cutters with materials that are a greater
diameter than is recommended, for example if you are cutting
toughened steel, you risk breaking or damaging the side cutter.
The cutting edges should if possible be used in the middle and not
on the top or front edges.
B
34
100 mm
50 mm
0 mm
Side Cutter
Side Cutter
With bevelled cutting blades, inductive hardening, for hard wire – not
suitable for steel screws. Not suitable for stainless steel or titanium.
For steel screws up to a maximum of 1.6 mm,
with plastic grip protection.
Standard:
With plastic grip:
1570 00 N
1574 00
140 mm
140 g
140 mm
145 g
B
35
Side Cutter
Side Cutter
Larger version of the side cutter No. 1576 05.
For steel and titanium screws up to 1.4 mm.
Extremely fine and pointed cutting surface for
titanium and steel screws up to max. 1.2 mm.
With plastic grip:
With plastic grip:
1576 15
1576 05
130 mm
100 g
115 mm
75 g
Tips & Tricks
Easy Mounting
of Spring Hinges
B
36
Make Spring
Hinge Mounting
a Piece of Cake!
Spring Hinge Pliers
No. 1514 55
Hand Tool
No. 1514 56
Screw Driving Tweezer
No. 1627 00
Spare Pins
No. 1514 58
approx. 2–3 minutes
As a set: No. 1514 99
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
This is how it works
Option 1: Mounting with plier, tweezer and hand tool
Attaching
Stretching
Holding
B
37
1
Hold the hand tool with the temple outside
facing the hand tool.
2
Attach the temple onto the pin.
3
Stretch the temple and hold it with
one hand.
Clamping
Releasing and attaching
Tighten
4
5
6
Release the plier and clamp the hinge roll on
the lowest point close to the hinge.
Release the clamped temple from
the pin.
Attach the temple to the frame, insert the
screw and tighten it. Release the plier by
pushing the handles together.
Option 2: Mounting with pins, tweezer and hand tool
Repeat step 1–3
Clamping
Releasing and attaching
Tighten
4
5
6
Choose the right size of pin and place it
in the gap between roll and hinge.
Release the clamped temple from
the hand tool.
Attach the temple to the frame,
insert the screw and tighten it.
Release the pin.
Tips & Tricks
Easy Mounting of Spring Hinges – page B 36 and B 37
B
38
Set of Spring Hinge Pliers
Spring Hinge Pliers with Pins
Replacement tool
The pliers clamp just the eyelet of the hinge.
No scratching of the temple! The eyelet of the
hinge is clamped and locked with the pliers or
the pins. This simplifies the screw fitting. The
handy clamping tool No. 1514 56, the pins No.
1514 58 and the tweezer No. 1627 00
are included.
1514 55
1514 56
1514 99
1627 00
Spare pins
1514 58
Screw Driving Tweezer
3 pieces
Pliers Stand
Made of beech wood to store approx. 10 pliers
or miscellaneous items.
Compatible with
1664 50 Screwdriver-Set in wooden block
With 4 screwdrivers, screwdriver blade 1.0; 1.4;
1.8 and 2.3 mm, plus 1 Phillips head screwdriver
Size 2.0 mm
Contents not included!
1460 40
200 x 130 x 105 mm
960 g
Pliers Stand
Colour: Transparent
Acrylic plastic, with 6 drill holes dia. 10 mm and
6 drill holes dia. 12 mm to store screwdrivers etc.
Contents not included!
1460 17
300 x 130 x 165 mm
700 g
B
39
B
40
Pliers Stand
Stainless steel, to store approx. 10 pliers.
With rubber feet to avoid scratches on
the table top.
Contents not included!
1461 10
180 x 100 x 110 mm
450 g
Matching rubber rings
Colour: Blue
1461 11
4 pieces
Pliers Stand
Colour: Transparent
Transparent acrylic plastic, to store approx.
10 pliers. Pliers stand No. 1460 19 comes
unasssembled.
Can easily be assembled without tools.
Contents not included!
1460 19
238 x 112 x 125 mm
400 g
B&S Tool Case
including Tools
Handy kit ready to go!
It contains the most useful pliers and spare
parts for adjusting and refurbishing spectacles.
Including the following tools:
1x 1558 55, 1x 1551 50, 1x 1549 50,
1x 1548 50, 1x 1651 00, 1x 1626 00,
1x 1683 90, 1x 2373 00,
1x accessory box with nose pads and screws
1464 00
270 x 150 x 50 mm
730 g
B&S Tool Caddy
Plastic tool stand to store approx. 8 pliers and
6 screwdrivers. All important tools in one place!
Additional function third hand stand and silicone pad as supporting area.
Suitable for the screwdrivers 1664 . ., 1665 . .,
and 1682 . . Including 4 exchangeable blades
for the third hand in sizes –1.6; –1.8; +1.5 and
+1.8. Silicone pad and blades are available as
spare parts.
1463 00
190 x 210 x 190 mm
430 g
Professional protection whilst adjusting
frames (see page E 18–E 20).
Magnetic Tool Bar ECO
Contents not included!
1411 05
500 x 40 x 23 mm
375 g
B
41
C
Small and Precision Tools
C2
C 16
C 17
C 20
C 22
C 24
C 25
C 26
C 27
C 28
C 31
C 37
C 38
C 42
C 44
Screwdrivers & Nutdrivers
Third Hand
Tweezers
Rimless Frames Glazing Tools
Tips & Tricks: Screw Cutter
Screw Cutter
Reamers
Small Tools
Screw Taps
Tips & Tricks: Screw Retainer
Drills and Millers
Tool Holders
Files
Cutting Tools
Ball Joint Vices
B & S screwdrivers for professionals “Made in Germany“
Durability, precision and perfect function.
No twisting or chipping of the screwdriver blades: hardened and refined knife blade steel for the perfect combination of hardness and flexibility.
Quickchange of the blade: perfectly accurate fit between blade and grip by simple clamping
No pressure marks in your hand: ergonomic design, proven to work, offers a high level of functionality.
Don’t be satisfied with anything less.
B&S Designed Pro Screwdriver –
for Phillips and Slotted Blades
C
2
•
•
•
•
Blade changing support for screwdriver and nutdriver
With longer grip surface and bigger knob for comfortable work
Coloured knob, the oval shape prevents the screwdriver moving on the workbench
Shaft size 2.5 mm, blades to be clamped
1664 . .
115 mm
1664 01
Green
1664 00
Green
1664 10
Grey
1664 14
Blue
1664 18
Red
1664 23
Black
Blade width:
1.5 mm
Blade width:
2.0 mm
Blade width:
1.0 mm
Blade width:
1.4 mm
Blade width:
1.8 mm
Blade width:
2,3 mm
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
1711 26
1711 25
1711 10
1711 14
1711 18
1711 23
Spare blades: Shaft size 2.5 mm, blades to be clamped
3 pieces
Pro Screwdriver Set
• In a semi-circular wooden stand
• With 5 screwdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
• 4 slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm, 1 Phillips head 2 mm
1664 50
Insertion Cup Holder Set
• 5 insertion cups, marked with different sizes
• To insert into desktops or the dispensing area
1465 50
OptiCar – including Screwdrivers
• High quality metal design with free moving solid rubber wheels
• With 5 screwdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
OptiCar with:
4 screwdrivers: slotted blade 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.3 mm
1 screwdriver: Phillips head 2.0 mm
1664 60
C
3
Revolving Depot
•
•
•
•
Revolving aluminium stand
With 6 screwdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
4 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm
2 Phillips head 1.5 and 2.0 mm
1664 61
Plastic Depot
• With 6 screwdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
• 4 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm
• 2 Phillips head 1.5 and 2.0 mm
1664 62
B & S nutdrivers for professionals “Made in Germany“
Durability, precision and perfect function.
No twisting or chipping of the screwdriver blades: hardened and refined knife blade steel for the perfect combination of hardness and flexibility.
Quickchange of the blade: perfectly accurate fit between blade and grip by simple clamping
No pressure marks in your hand: ergonomic design, proven to work, offers a high level of functionality.
Don’t be satisfied with anything less.
B&S Designed Pro Nutdriver “Made in Germany” –
for Nutdriver Blades
C
4
•
•
•
•
1664 40
2.2 mm
Blade changing support for screwdriver and nutdriver
With longer grip surface and bigger knob for comfortable work
Coloured, oval knob prevents moving on the workbench
Shaft size: 2.5 mm, blades to be clamped
1664 . .
115 mm
1664 42
1664 43
1664 44
Big star nuts,
6 points
Small hex nuts
Big star nuts,
4 points
Star nuts, 6
points, for the
most common
nuts
Hex socket
star type,
6 points
Hexagonal,
for dome nuts
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
1711 44
1711 45
1711 46
2.0 mm
1664 49
Big hex nuts
1711 43
2.1 mm
1664 48
Star nuts,
6 points,
1711 42
2.0 mm
1664 46
2.6 mm
1711 40
2.2 mm
1664 45
2.6 mm
1711 48
Spare blades: Shaft size 2.5 mm, blades to be clamped
3 pieces
2.3 mm
1711 49
OptiCar – including Nutdrivers
• High quality metal design with free moving solid rubber wheels
• With 5 nutdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
1 Opticar with 5 nutdrivers:
Hexagon 2.3; 2.6 mm
Star 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1664 70
C
5
Revolving Depot
•
•
•
•
Revolving aluminium stand
With 8 nutdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
Hexagon 2.0; 2.2; 2.3; 2.6 mm
Star 2.0; 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1664 71
Plastic Depot
• With 8 nutdrivers from the B & S Pro series 1664 . .
• Hexagon 2.0; 2.2; 2.3; 2.6 mm
• Star 2.0; 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1664 72
B & S Screwdriver from the Standard Series –
for Phillips and Slotted Blades
•
•
•
•
•
Blade changing support for screwdriver and nutdriver
Ribbed grip surface for perfect grip
Coloured, round knob flattened on one side, to prevent the screwdriver moving on the workbench
Wing blades to avoid twisting inside the handle
Shaft size: 3.0 mm, wing blade
1682 . .
C
6
110 mm
1682 01
Green
1682 00
Green
1682 10
Grey
1682 14
Blue
1682 18
Red
1682 23
Black
Blade width:
1.5 mm
Blade width:
2.0 mm
Blade width:
1.0 mm
Blade width:
1.4 mm
Blade width:
1.8 mm
Blade width:
2.3 mm
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
1682 46
1682 45
1682 30
1682 34
1682 38
1682 43
Spare blades: Shaft size 3.0 mm, wing blade
3 pieces
OptiCar – including Screwdrivers
• High quality metal design with free moving solid rubber wheels
• With 5 screwdrivers from the B & S Standard series 1682 . .
1 Opticar with:
4 screwdrivers: slotted blade 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm,
1 screwdriver: Phillips head 2.0 mm
1682 60
Revolving Depot
• With 6 screwdrivers from the B & S Standard series 1682 . .
• 4 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1,8; 2.3 mm
• 2 Phillips head 1.5 and 2.0 mm
1682 61
Plastic Depot
• With 6 screwdrivers from the B & S Standard series 1682 . .
• 4 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm
• 2 Phillips head 1.5 and 2.0 mm
1682 62
B & S Screwdriver from the Standard Series –
for Nutdriver Blades
•
•
•
•
•
Blade changing support for screwdriver and nutdriver
Ribbed grip surface for perfect grip
Coloured, round knob flattened on one side, to prevent the screwdriver moving on the workbench
Wing blades to avoid twisting inside the handle
Shaft size: 3.0 mm, wing blade
1682 . .
1682 70
110 mm
1682 72
2,2 mm
1682 73
1682 74
1682 78
Big hex nuts
Big star nuts,
6 points
Small hex nuts
Big star nuts,
4 points
Star nuts, 6
points, for the
most common
nuts
Hex socket
star type,
6 points
Hexagonal,
for dome nuts
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
1682 83
1682 84
1682 85
2,1 mm
1682 86
2,0 mm
1682 79
Star nuts,
6 points,
1682 82
2,0 mm
1682 76
2,6 mm
1682 80
2,2 mm
1682 75
2,6 mm
1682 88
2,3 mm
1682 89
Spare blades: Shaft size 3.0 mm, wing blade
2 pieces
OptiCar – including Nutdrivers
• High quality metal design with free moving solid rubber wheels
1 Opticar with 5 nutdrivers from the B & S Standard series 1682 . .
Hexagon 2.3; 2.6 mm,
Star 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1682 90
Revolving Depot
• With 8 nutdrivers from the B & S Standard series 1682 . .
• Hexagon 2.0; 2.2; 2.3; 2.6 mm
• Star 2.0; 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1682 91
Plastic Depot
• With 8 nutdrivers from the B & S Standard series 1682 . .
• Hexagon 2.0; 2.2; 2.3; 2.6 mm
• Star 2.0; 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1682 92
C
7
B & S Screwdriver from the Basic Series –
for Phillips and Slotted Blades
•
•
•
•
Blade changing support for screwdriver and nutdriver
Lean design with ribbed grip surface for perfect grip
Wing blades to avoid twisting inside the handle
Shaft size: 3.0 mm, wing blade
1683 . .
C
8
110 mm
1683 01
Black
1683 00
Black
1683 10
Black
1683 14
Black
1683 18
Black
1683 23
Black
Blade width:
1.5 mm
Blade width:
2.0 mm
Blade width:
1.0 mm
Blade width:
1.4 mm
Blade width:
1.8 mm
Blade width:
2.3 mm
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
1682 46
1682 45
1682 30
1682 34
Screwdriver with Blade Storage
• Including 4 screwdriver blades
• 3 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8 mm
• 1 Phillips head 1.5 mm
1683 90
Revolving Depot
• With 5 screwdrivers from the B & S Basic series 1683 . .
• 4 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm
• 2 Phillips head 1.5 and 2.0 mm
1683 61
Plastic Depot
• With 6 screwdrivers from the B & S Basic series 1683 . .
• 4 Slotted blades 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm
• 2 Phillips head 1.5 and 2.0 mm
1683 62
1682 38
1682 43
Spare blades:
Shaft size 3.0 mm, wing blade
3 pieces
B & S Screwdriver from the Basic Series –
for Nutdriver Blades
•
•
•
•
Blade changing support for screwdriver and nutdriver
Lean design with ribbed grip surface for perfect grip
Wing blades to avoid twisting inside the handle
Shaft size: 3.0 mm, wing blade
1683 . .
1683 40
110 mm
1683 42
2,2 mm
1683 43
1683 44
1683 48
Big hex nuts
Big star nuts,
6 points
Small hex nuts
Big star nuts,
4 points
Star nuts, 6
points, for the
most common
nuts
Hex socket
star type,
6 points
Hexagonal,
for dome nuts
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
Spare blade:
1682 83
1682 84
1682 85
2,1 mm
1682 86
2,0 mm
1683 49
Star nuts,
6 points,
1682 82
2,0 mm
1683 46
2,6 mm
1682 80
2,2 mm
1683 45
2,6 mm
1682 88
2,3 mm
1682 89
Spare blades: Shaft size 3.0 mm, wing blade
2 pieces
Revolving Depot
• With 8 nutdrivers from the B & S Basic series 1683 . .
• Hexagon 2.0; 2.2; 2.3; 2.6 mm
• Star 2.0; 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1683 71
Plastic Depot
• With 8 nutdrivers from the B & S Basic series 1683 . .
• Hexagon 2.0; 2.2; 2.3; 2.6 mm
• Star 2.0; 2.1; 2.2; 2.6 mm
1683 72
C
9
It’s magnetic!
It’s no secret that a special blade steel is used for the manufacturing of these Optimagnets. By using a costly and closely controlled hardening
process this steel achieves a special Rockwell hardness of >60. Only in this way can the steel reach its ideal combination of hardness and
flexibility. But the ingenious principle of this Optimagnet is not rocket science: Magnetism! The multipurpose tool works with a magnetic
blade exchanging system. You can easily make a nutdriver or a third hand out of a screwdriver. Perfected design and advanced functionality
guarantees professional work in the workshop or the sales area.
C
10
Bits of different types can be
switched quickly and easily thanks
to the magnetic holder.
The hexagon design means that all
sets can be usefully combined with
each other.
The engraving
identifies the
order
number (examine
detailed picture).
Magnetic Tool Holder with Rack and
Bits for use as Screwdriver, Nutdriver and as a “Third Hand”
• B & S designed tool holder
• Magnetic hexagon pick-up for screwdriver and nutdriver blades
• Blades of different types can be switched quickly
and easily
• Comparable with the bit-system for screwdrivers
Available in 3 different sets:
Materials supplied: 5 blades (screwdriver or nutdriver),
one magnetic tool holder and a stand
OptiMagnet – Mix-Set
Consists of: 3 screwdrivers (1.4, 1.8; +) and 2 nutdrivers (4; 6)
Contents: No. 1669 14; 1669 18; 1669 25; 1669 44 and 1669 46
1669 50
OptiMagnet – Screwdriver Set
Consists of: 5 screwdrivers (1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3; +)
C
11
Contents: No. 1669 10; 1669 14; 1669 18; 1669 23 and 1669 25
1669 20
OptiMagnet – Nutdriver Set
Consists of: 5 nutdrivers (3; 4; 5; 6; 8)
Contents: No. 1669 43; 1669 44; 1669 45; 1669 46 and 1669 48
1669 40
OptiMagnet –
Third Hand with Mixed Blade Set
Consists of: 3 screwdrivers (1.4; 1.8; +) and 2 nutdrivers (4; 6)
Contents: No. 1669 14; 1669 18; 1669 25; 1669 44 and 1669 46
1669 70
OptiMagnet –
Magnetic Tool Holder without Blade
1669 01
92 mm
Hexagon Replacement Blades and Nutdrivers suitable for OptiMagnet
Description
Order No.
1.0
Blade, 1.0 mm
1669 10
2 pieces
1.4
Blade, 1.4 mm
1669 14
2 pieces
1.8
Blade, 1.8 mm
1669 18
2 pieces
2.3
Blade, 2.3 mm
1669 23
2 pieces
+
Crossblade
1669 25
2 pieces
2
Nutdriver big hex nuts, 2.6 mm
1669 42
2 pieces
3
Nutdriver big star nuts, 6 points, 2.2 mm
1669 43
2 pieces
4
Nutdriver small hex nuts, 2.2 mm
1669 44
2 piece
5
Nutdriver star nuts, 4 points, 2.0 mm
1669 45
2 pieces
6
Nutdriver star nuts, 6 points, 2.1 mm
1669 46
2 pieces
7
Nutdriver slotted nuts, 2.8 mm
1669 47
2 pieces
8
Nutdriver hex socket star type, 2.0 mm
1669 48
2 pieces
9
Nutdriver hex for cap nuts, 2.3 mm
1669 49
2 pieces
0
Nutdriver star nuts, 6 points, e.g. for Bausch & Lomb frames, 2.2 mm
1669 67
2 pieces
x
Nutdriver ornamental screws, 3.6 mm
1669 69
2 pieces
Engrave No.
Type
B & S Designed Screwdriver with Blade Storage
With large oval revolving plastic knob and 5 blades (accomodated in handle).
The oval head prevents the screwdriver moving on the workstation.
Shaft size: 2.5 mm
Blade width: 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm, 2.0 mm
1666 00
119 mm
35 g
C
12
Suitable replacement bits No. 1711 . .
can be found on page C 2.
Screwdriver with Blade Storage
With plastic grip, large round revolving knob and 5 blades (accomodated in handle).
Blade width: 1.0; 1.4; 1.8; 2.3 mm, 2.0 mm
1678 00
119 mm
31 g
Suitable replacement bits No. 1711 . .
can be found on page C 2.
Screwdriver with Blade Storage
Same design as No. 1678 00, but with one blade only.
Shaft size: 2.5 mm
Blade width: 1.8 mm
1690 00
119 mm
21 g
Suitable replacement bit No. 1711 18
can be found on page C 2.
Universal Screwdriver with Blade Storage
Nickel plated brass, with revolving plastic knob and 4 blades.
Shaft size: 2.5 mm
Blade width: 1.5; 1.8; 2.3 mm, 2.0 mm
1717 00
115 mm
30 g
Suitable replacement bits No. 1711 . .
can be found on page C 2.
Small Metal Screwdriver
• With 5 different functions, with slotted,
Phillips and 3 nutdriver blades
• Blades width: 1.8 mm, 1.8 mm
• Nutdriver: 2.02; 2.32; 2.57 mm
In attractive plastic case:
1798 02
1798 12
5 pieces
10 pieces
C
13
In poly bag:
1798 13
10 pieces
Counter Display
• With 10 small screwdriver No. 1798 . .,
with 5 functions
• Dimensions: DIN A4
1798 52
Spare Blades
Blade width =
Shaft size
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
1.8 mm
2.3 mm
* discontinued
Type
Available for
Order No.
1662 10*, 1680 10*, 1700 10*
1662 15*, 1680 15*, 1700 15*
1662 18*, 1680 18*, 1700 18*
1662 23*, 1680 23*, 1700 23*, 1723 . .
1693 10
1693 15
1693 18
1693 23
3 pieces
3 pieces
3 pieces
3 pieces
A perfect Set.
From the Black Forest in Germany onto your work-bench. Assorted by sizes in a beech wooden case.
Seven lean nutdrivers with the most used nutdriver blades made of high quality steel. The stop inside the blade which is typically for
B&S nutdrivers prevents the nut from annoyingly “disappearing” into the shaft.
Nutdriver Set
Content 7 nutdrivers:
No. 1742 00; 1743 00; 1744 00; 1745 00; 1746 00;
1748 00 and 1767 00
C
14
Empty nutdriver box: No. 1441 15
1741 15
17. . . .
Single available:
1742 00
1743 00
1744 00
100 mm
1745 00
13.5 x 2.4 x 12 cm
15 g
1746 00
1747 00
1748 00
1749 00
1767 00
2.6 mm
2.6 mm
2.2 mm
2.0 mm
2.1 mm
2.8 mm
2.0 mm
2.3 mm
2.2 mm
Grip No. 2
Grip No. 3
Grip No. 4
Grip No. 5
Grip No. 6
Grip No. 7
Grip No. 8
Grip No. 9
Grip No. 0
Big hex nuts
Big star nuts,
6 points
Small hex
nuts
Big star nuts,
4 points
Star nuts, 6
points, for
the most
common
nuts
Slotted nuts
Hex socket
star type,
6 points
Hexagonal,
for dome
nuts No.
0839 . . and
No. 0840 . .
Star nuts, 6
points, e.g.
for Bausch &
Lomb frames
Nutdriver Set
Content 5 nutdrivers:
No. 1743 00; 1744 00; 1745 00; 1746 00 and 1748 00
Empty nutdriver box: No.1441 05
1741 05
13.5 x 2.7 x 9.6 cm
The number on the grip
identifies the order code.
Broken screw? No problem!
Here precision and comfort goes hand in hand. Broken screws can be pushed out cleanly and precisely with this handy tool. Simply fit on the
hand clavulus, tighten up the wing screw and with a few turns there will be space for a new screw.
Handheld CLAVULUS
• For the removal of broken screws
• Compact and ergonomic tool
• Power precisely adjustable through the
wing screw
• For material saving use
• 3 exchangeable sleeves for different
screw diameters included
• Hardwearing material (stainless steel)
C
15
1727 00
Screwdriver Set
with Finger Holders
Small set in a high quality portable aluminium box.
It contains:
• One tool handle with three blades to change
(blade 2.4; 1.8 as well as Phillips head 1.8)
• 5 finger rings to put on with scratch protection
(3 nut holder, 1 blade 1.8 and one Phillips
head 1.8)
1790 50
10.5 x 2 x 6.5 cm
80 g
Screw Remover with Blade Storage
Spare Blades
The sharp edged blades grip the remains of broken off screws and enable you to unscrew the
screw without the use of drilling machines.
Shaft size: 2.5 mm
Per unit includes 2 blades with diameter: 1.3 and 1.5 mm
Blade width 1.3 mm
1691 13
Blade width 1.5 mm
1691 15
1691 00
119 mm
25 g
Aluminium Stand
“OptiMagnet” Third Hand
with Mixed Blade Set
• Stable stand
• With 5 exchangeable blades in the socket
for securing screws or nuts
3 slotted blades:
No. 1669 14, 1669 18 and 1669 25
2 nutdriver blades:
No. 1669 44 and 1669 46
C
16
1669 70
Suitable replacement bits No. 1669 . .
can be found on page C 11.
Aluminium Stand “Third Hand”
• Stable stand
• With 3 exchangeable blades in the socket
for securing screws or nuts
1 screwdriver blade:
blade width: 2.3 mm
shaft diameter: 2.5 mm
1 hex nutdriver:
inner diameter: 2.2 mm
shaft diameter: 2.5 mm
1 star nutdriver:
inner diameter: 2.1 mm
shaft diameter: 2.5 mm
1723 00
Suitable replacement bits No. 1711 . .
can be found on page C 2.
Metal Stand “Third Hand”
• Stable stand
• With 5 exchangeable blades and 7 functions
for securing screws or nuts
• Shaft size: 3.15 mm, wing blade
1 screwdriver blade
with double sided function:
blade width: 1.5 and 1.8 mm
1 screwdriver Phillips head blade
with double sided function:
blade width: 1.5 and 1.8 mm
3 nutdriver blades (hexagon):
inner diameter: 2.0, 2.3 and 2.5 mm
1728 00
Spare Blade Set
To metal stand “Third Hand” No. 1728 00
Containing 5 blades.
1728 01
Aluminium Stand “Third Hand”
Extra Tall for Large Wing Blades
• Stable stand
• With 5 exchangeable blades and 7 functions
for securing screws or nuts
• Shaft size: 3.15 mm, wing blade
1 screwdriver blade with double sided function:
blade width: 1.5 and 1.8 mm
1 screwdriver Phillips head blade with double
sided function:
blade width: 1.5 and 1.8 mm
3 nut driver blades (hex.):
inner diameter: 2.0; 2.3 and 2.5 mm
1728 10
Screw Driving Tweezer
• Easy fixation of the screw by means of a lock at the middle of
the tweezer
• Screw is fixed and ready to screw in, essential for spring hinges
• Moving knob at the end of the handle enables easy screwing
1627 00
130 mm
30 g
Set of Spring Hinge Pliers
with Tool and Tweezer
• For easy and stress free assembly of temples
with spring hinges
• More information see page B 38
1514 99
Tips & Tricks
Easy Mounting of Spring Hinges – page B 36 and B 37
C
17
Nut Gripper
• Retains nuts so that they can be screwed to the thread
• For problem free gripping of nuts
1639 00
100 mm
35 g
C
18
Gripper
• Recessed both sides to pick up, grip and twist screws
1636 00
75 mm
180 g
Tweezer – Push-in Nose Pads
For removal of “push-in nose pads”.
• Also available as pliers (see No. 1502 00 N on page B 18)
1626 00
100 mm
15 g
Tweezer – Thin Pointed
Tweezer – Pointed
• With thin pointed tips, stainless steel
• Pointed, nickel plated
1631 00
1621 00
110 mm
17 g
110 mm
18 g
Titanium Soldering Tweezer
Solder Tweezer
• Advantages: solder resistant, low heat conduction, 100 % antimagnetic,
highly acid resistant, extremely light, with centering pin.
• With insulated grips, polished steel
1623 10
1624 00
160 mm
15 g
160 mm
35 g
Screw Holder
Angled – with Locking Mechanism
• A slotted notch in the tip to grip nose pads and hinge screws easily.
• With a clamp to lock the screw
• The angled tip is useful for difficult to reach hinges
1653 00
110 mm
11 g
C
19
The Classic
• With grooves on both tips to hold pad screws and other small items
1651 00
130 mm
30 g
Pointed Tip
• Stainless steel, straight version
• Specially for pad screws
• To start rotating the screw into the thread
1634 00
105 mm
10 g
Cross Tweezer
• To start rotating the screw into the thread
1625 00
155 mm
32 g
Screw Holder with Locking Mechanism
• The locking mechanism ensures that the screw is held tightly
• Essential when fitting a screw to a spring hinge.
1637 00
135 mm
30 g
Sleeve Removing Tool
for Rimless Frames
• Small tool which helps to get the frame and leftovers
from the sleeves out of the lens
• Fits for all frames with 1.4 and 1.8 pins and standard
drill hole distances
75 x 10 x 25 mm
C
20
7g
2267 10
Blue
1.4 mm
2267 11
Orange
1.8 mm
Set of Sleeve Removing Tools for Rimless Frames
2267 50
2 pieces
Measurement Tool for Holes
1.0 to 1.6
• Easy and quick measuring of hole sizes
in lenses
• With rounded tips for easy handling
• High quality design
• 6 spikes in sizes: 1.0, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5
and 1.6 mm
Outer: 65 mm
10 g
1718 11
Measurement Tool for Holes
1.0 to 2.4
• Easy and quick measuring of hole sizes in
lenses
• With rounded tips for easy handling
• High quality design
• 10 spikes in sizes: 1.0; 1.1; 1.2; 1.4; 1.5; 1.6;
1.8; 2.0; 2.2 and 2.4 mm
Outer: 80 mm
26 g
1718 12
Mandrel
• Special support for screw setting on hinges
• Conical
• With plastic handle
Spare Mandrel
• For No. 1718 00
1718 00
105mm
10 g
1718 01
Fully developed. Workplace with high quality all-rounders.
This anvil tower is produced exclusively for B & S. With its unusual shape this heavy weight offers a range of advantages: Secure standing with
its massive aluminium foot. Flexibility due to the handy size. Small repairs can be fixed on the round platform. Protecting the table surface from
damage makes the rook anvil attractive to use for service repairs during a consultation. Depositing area for frame parts on the top.
Just try it. Everyone who has tried will never wants to be without it again.
Rook Anvil
•
•
•
•
•
•
C
21
To fix screws on joints, hinges and nose pad arms
Robust and stable, made of solid aluminium
Depositing area for frame parts
Cushioned base for gently carrying out work
Can be fixed on the table by a standard M6 screw
For workshop and sales area
Spare Rubber Ring
1729 00
Base x height: 80 x 80 mm
300 g
1729 01
2 pieces
Tips & Tricks
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
Fitting tool
for rimless frames
C
22
Shorten screws
without a burr!
Works as a nut driver and
screw cutter in one tool
No. 2268 00
for screws with 1.2 mm thread size
No. 2268 01
for screws with 1.4 mm thread size
approx. 30 seconds
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 22
07.02.14 13:44
This is how it works
Mounting
Turn around
C
23
1
Mount the nut with the nutdriver.
2
Turn the tool around.
Attaching
Cutting
3
4
Put the conical side of the screw cutter over
the end of the screw.
Carefully move it back and forth until the
screw snaps off.
Ejecting
Done
5
6
Eject the end of the screw from the tool
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 23
Done.
07.02.14 13:44
Tips & Tricks
Fitting tool for rimless frames – page C 22 and C 23
Works as a nut driver and screw cutter
in one tool
2268 . .
70 mm
6g
C
24
2268 00
• To shorten screws with 1.2 mm thread
• For all popular hex nuts with an outer diameter of max. 2.7 mm
2268 01
• To shorten screws with 1.4 mm thread
• For all popular star nuts with an outer diameter of max. 2.5 mm
Tool Kit for Rimless Frames
• Practical tool kit for rimless frames
• Consisting of No. 2268 00 and 2268 01 fitting tool for 1.2 mm
and 1.4 mm thread and No. 2266 20 drill hole chamfer tool
2268 50
Drill Hole Chamfer Tool
Drilled Hole Reamer
• For easy chamfering of drill holes
• The special shape chamfers the edges quickly and effectively using
just slight pressure
• Countersinks are no problem
• Clockwise rotation for clean, optimum results
• Only recommended for CR 39, Polycarbonate or Trivex lenses
• Suitable for tool holders No. 2069 00, 2068 00 and 2065 00
• Shaft size: 1.6 mm
2266 10
2266 20
71 mm
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 24
7g
07.02.14 13:44
Reamers
• 5-sided, high-polished, without handle, with shaft
2051 . .
3 pieces
Order No.
C
25
Order No.
2051 31
2051 32
2051 33
2051 34
2051 35
1.0 mm
1.1 mm
1.2 mm
1.3 mm
1.6 mm
2051 36
2051 37
2051 38
2051 39
1.7 mm
1.9 mm
2.0 mm
2.2 mm
Reamer Assortment
• 5-sided shaped reamers, fine grade, with knurled handle
• Reamers-Ø: 1.0; 1.1; 1.2; 1.4; 1.6 and 1.8 mm
2053 00
25 g
6 pieces
Reamer Assortment for Single Jets
Reamer Assortment
• With plastic handle, for cleaning of jets
• Reamers-Ø: 0.05; 0.08; 0.10; 0.15; 0.20; 0.25; 0.30; 0.35;
0.40; 0.45; 0.50 and 0.55 mm
• 5-sided reamers, fine grade without handle, with shaft and with holder
• Contents: No. 2051 31; 2051 32; 2051 33; 2051 34; 2051 35;
2051 36; 2051 37; 2051 38 and 2051 39
2840 20
2050 00
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 25
11 g
12 pieces
30 g
12 pieces
07.02.14 13:45
Rivet Miller
• To ream rivet heads and screw ends
Double Hand Miller with
Hinge Miller and Screw End
Miller
Duplex Hinge and Temple
Miller
• To work with joints and temple hinge rolls
• To work with hinge rolls and screw ends
2220 03 Miller size 3.0 mm
2221 02
2216 00
110 mm
2g
122 mm
2220 04 Miller size 3.5 mm
5g
110 mm
2g
C
26
Screw End Miller
• For milling of screw ends
(except steel screws)
• Shaft size: 2.5 mm
2271 25
110 mm
2g
Nylon Thread Hook
• For easy assembly of lenses into supra frames
1719 00
105 mm
13 g
The tools No. 2217 03 (page C 36), 2216 00 and 2271 25 are for processing common German Silver screws and brass screws.
Processing steel screws will immediately damage the tool. Improper usage voids all guarantees.
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 26
07.02.14 13:45
Screw Tap
Screw Tap Handle
• “Made in Switzerland”
• With 3 milled grooves, expertly ground and
hardened for top quality finish
• For correct order no’s see chart below
• Plastic, marked with individual tap sizes
• For correct order no’s see chart below
1962 . .
1736 . .
3 pieces
85 mm
10 g
C
27
Illustration enlarged
Thread size
M 0.80 mm
M 1.00 mm
M 1.10 mm
M 1.20 mm
M 1.30 mm
M 1.40 mm
M 1.50 mm
M 1.60 mm
M 1.70 mm
M 2.00 mm
Shaft size
Order No. for
Order No. for
screw taps
screw tap handles
1962 08
1962 10
1962 11
1962 12
1962 13
1962 14
1962 15
1962 16
1962 17
1962 20
1736 08
1736 10
1736 11
1736 12
1736 13
1736 14
1736 15
1736 16
1736 17
–*
1.45 mm
1.45 mm
1.45 mm
1.45 mm
1.45 mm
1.45 mm
1.75 mm
1.95 mm
1.95 mm
2.40 mm
* We recommend the handle No. 2068 00 (page C 37).
Screw Tap Assortment
• Screw Tap “Made in Switzerland”
• In a blue plastic box with moulded insert
• Contents: 3 screw taps of each No. 1962 08; 1962 10; 1962 12;
1962 13; 1962 14 and 1 tool holder No. 2062 00
1981 00
Screw Tap Assortment
• Screw Tap “Made in Switzerland”
• In wooden box
• Contents: 9 screw taps, ready to use, in sizes: M 0.80; M 1.00;
M 1.10; M 1.20; M 1.30; M 1.40; M 1.50; M 1.60;
M 1.70; 1 mandrel No. 1718 00 and 1 empty space
1980 00
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 27
07.02.14 13:45
Tips & Tricks
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
Screw retainer
C
28
Easy mounting
of nose pads!
Screw retainer
No. 2273 00
Screwdriver
No. 1664 10
approx. 1–2 minutes
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 28
07.02.14 13:45
This is how it works
Inserting
Attaching
Mounting
C
29
1
Insert the screw into the screw retainer …
2
… attach the screw retainer onto the screw
driver.
Tighten
Removing
4
5
Tighten the screw and you’re done.
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 29
3
Mount the nose pad.
Remove the screw retainer and store it for
the next use.
07.02.14 13:45
Tips & Tricks
Screw retainer – page C 28 and C 29
Screw retainer
•
•
•
•
•
C
30
Conical silicone tubes with indicated threads
Colour: transparent
Total length: 10.15 mm
Size of the cone: 4.10 mm to 3.40 mm
Size of the hole: top 2.30 mm / bottom 1.00 mm
2273 00
50 pieces
Lens protection Henry
• Protects the lenses from scratches: while mounting nose pads,
during the assembly of rimless frames and while mounting rim joints
• Made of silicone
2272 00
60 x 80 mm
1g
2 pieces
Lens protection shim plate
• Distance and protection plate for easily cutting plastic sleeves
(1.4 and 1.8 mm) close to the lens
• Nylon liner (max. 1.0 mm diameter) can be fixed and shortened easily
close to the lens
• Suitable to remove remnants from PC lenses after the edging process
2269 00
55 x 20 mm
1g
Lens protection shim plate with long holes
• Small plate to protect the lens while cutting the bridge of plastic sleeves.
• Read the same as product 2269 00 above.
2269 10
50 x 11 mm
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 30
1g
13.02.14 09:29
Small Tools Assortment
• To use for frames
• Content: 1 diamond miller, 2 diamond grinder, 2 turbo millers,
2 groove millers, 1 cutting wheel (10 pieces) including
mandrel, 3 grinder, 1 Steel miller, 1 brass wire brush,
3 buffing wheels, 4 silicone polishers
C
31
• In practical box
• Shaft size: 2.34 mm except No. 2240 37 = shaft size: 3.0 mm
2240 57
68 x 58 x 66 mm
85 g
2264 00
2240 15
2240 37
2240 42
2240 41
2240 48
2240 49
2240 05
2240 07
2240 11
2240 31
2240 32
2240 33
2240 34
2240 19
2240 29
2240 18
Shape
Application range
Size mm
Max. rpm
Order No.
Grinder, ball
Grinder, wheel
Grinder, cylindric
Brass wire brush
Silicone impregnated muslin wheel
Wool buffing wheel
Flannel buffing wheel
Silicone burnisher, middle, pin
Silicone burnisher, middle, wheel
Silicone burnisher, fine, pin
Silicone burnisher, fine, wheel
Groove miller, facet
Steel miller, bud shape
Cutting wheel (10 pieces)
inclusive mandrel
Diamond grinder, shell shape
Diamond grinder, conical
Diamond miller
To grind unhardened and alloyed steel
To grind unhardened and alloyed steel
To grind unhardened and alloyed steel
To rework soldering joints
To polish plastic materials
To polish plastic and ceramic
To polish plastic and metal
To work on metal, plastic and ceramic
To work on metal, plastic and ceramic
For high gloss on metal alloy
For high gloss on metal alloy
To rework frame grooves
To work on metal, plastic and wood
To cut metal and plastic
Ø5
Ø 6 x 2.8
2.5 x 6.5
21 x 1.8
Ø 22
Ø 20
Ø 20
4.5 x 12
11 x 2
5 x 10
14 x 2.5
17 x 2.8
Ø6
22 x 0.8
20,000–30,000
20,000–30,000
20,000–30,000
10,000
5,000
8,000
5,000
7,000–10,000
7.000–10,000
7,000–10,000
7,000–10,000
2,000–4,000
8,000–12,000
30,000
2240 05
2240 07
2240 11
2240 15
2240 18
2240 19
2240 29
2240 31
2240 32
2240 33
2240 34
2240 37
2240 41
2240 42
For fine grinding and planing
For fine grinding and planing
To groove rims of lenses
Ø 1.8
Ø 1.6
5 x 0.6
30,000
30,000
15,000–18,000
2240 48
2240 49
2264 00
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 31
07.02.14 13:45
Spiral Drill, HSS
• For drilling out steel screws, for drilling in
Titanium as well as lens material such as
CR39 and Transition lenses
• Designed for working on hard materials
• Extremely durable
• Working speed: 1,400 to 10,000 rpm
• Field of application: Plastic materials, polycarbonate, steel, Titanium and precious
metals
• Shaft size: 2.34 mm
• These drills are also available as an assortment
No. 2038 50 (please see below)
• With cylinder shaft, right cut
• Working speed: 500 to 3,000 rpm
• Field of application: Plastic materials and
precious metals
2 pieces
Order No.
Size
2038 05
2038 06
2038 07
2038 08
2038 09
2038 10
2038 11
2038 12
2038 13
2038 14
2038 15
2038 16
0.5 mm
0.6 mm
0.7 mm
0.8 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
1.1 mm
1.2 mm
1.3 mm
1.4 mm
1.5 mm
1.6 mm
200 %
2038 . .
2032 . .
100 %
200 %
100 %
C
32
Spiral Drill, HSS Special
3 pieces
Order No.
Shaft size
Size
2032 05
2032 06
2032 07
2032 08
2032 09
2032 10
2032 11
2032 12
2032 13
2032 14
2032 15
2032 16
2032 17
2032 18
2032 20
0.5 mm
0.6 mm
0.7 mm
0.8 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
1.1 mm
1.2 mm
1.3 mm
1.4 mm
1.5 mm
1.6 mm
1.7 mm
1.8 mm
2.0 mm
0.5 mm
0.6 mm
0.7 mm
0.8 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
1.1 mm
1.2 mm
1.3 mm
1.4 mm
1.5 mm
1.6 mm
1.7 mm
1.8 mm
2.0 mm
HSS Spiral Drill Set
• 12 high quality spiral drills No. 2038 . .
• Contents: 2 twist drills, each of sizes:
0.8, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 mm
• In a practical lid box set
2038 50
124 x 21 x 113 mm
115 g
Hard Metal Drill
HSS Spiral Drill Set, 30 pcs
•
•
•
•
• Contents: 3 spiral drills, each of sizes: 0.5;
0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 1.0; 1.1; 1.2; 1.3;
and 1.4 mm
• In a practical lid box set
For drilling out steel screws stuck in hinges
Working speed: 10,000 to 15,000 rpm
Field of application: Steel screws
Shaft size: 2.34 mm
2032 50
200%
100%
2037 . .
210 x 18 x 113 mm
Order No.
Size
2037 10
2037 12
2037 14
2037 16
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.4 mm
1.6 mm
140 g
The drills No. 2037 . . are provided with a hard metal top.
We recommend using less pressure and cooling.
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 32
07.02.14 13:45
Drill-miller for NIDEK
• For Nidek CNC-machine ME-1000 and
AHM-1000
• Material: Tungsten steel
• Shaft diameter: 3.16 mm
Order No.
Size
2209 08
2209 10
0.8 mm
1.0 mm
Groove miller for
plastic frames
Groove miller for
metal frames
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
To rework plastic frame grooves
Adjustable for different plastic rim thicknesses
Shaft diameter: 3.12 mm
Speed: approx. 7,000–8,000 rpm
Wheel diameter: 10 x 2 mm
2242 00
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 33
10 pieces
C
33
200 %
100 %
2209 . .
To rework metal frame grooves
Adjustable for different metal rim thicknesses
Shaft diameter: 3.12 mm
Speed: approx. 7,000–8,000 rpm
Wheel diameter: 10 x 2 mm
2242 01
07.02.14 13:45
From 0.8 up to 2.3 mm. Each tenth made of quality.
Drilling and milling tools, “Made in Germany”. Quality products for quality work. Long service life, low wear and dimensional accuracy mean
they are a worthwhile investment. Don’t be misled by cheap imitations. Drill with reliable quality and enjoy perfect results.
Hard Metal Drill for Plastic Lenses
• Polished surfaces guarantees a clean cut
• Field of application: Plastic materials, polycarbonate
and Trivex
• Working speed: 1,000 to 5,000 rpm
• Shaft size: 3,175 mm
C
34
2035 . .
38 mm
Order No.
Size
Order No.
Size
2035 08
2035 09
2035 10
2035 11
2035 12
2035 13
2035 14
2035 15
0.8 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
1.1 mm
1.2 mm
1.3 mm
1.4 mm
1.5 mm
2035 16
2035 17
2035 18
2035 19
2035 20
2035 21
2035 22
2035 23
1.6 mm
1.7 mm
1.8 mm
1.9 mm
2.0 mm
2.1 mm
2.2 mm
2.3 mm
Hard metal drill set for Plastic Lenses
• Contents: 10 drills (0.8; 0.9; 1.0; 1.1; 1.2; 1.3; 1.4; 1.6; 1.8 and 2.0 mm)
• Details: See drills above
• Incl. half-transparent plastic box
2035 60
86 x 10 x 53 mm
60 g
Hard metal miller for Plastic Lenses
• To notch and mill plastic lenses, polycarbonate and Trivex
• High quality double cut miller with fishtail edge for a clean cut
and long life time
• Shaft size: 3.175 mm
double cut
2212 . .
38 mm
Order No.
Drillbit length
Miller size
2212 08
2212 09
2212 10
2212 11
2212 12
2212 13
2212 14
2212 16
8.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.0 mm
10.0 mm
0.8 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
1.1 mm
1.2 mm
1.3 mm
1.4 mm
1.6 mm
Drill and Miller Set for Plastic Lenses
• Contents: 6 drills (0.8; 1.0; 1.2; 1.4; 1.6 and 2.0 mm) plus
4 millers (1.0; 1.2; 1.4 and 1.6 mm)
• Details: See drills 2035 . . and 2212 . .
2035 50
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 34
86 x 10 x 53 mm
60 g
07.02.14 13:45
Drill-miller for plastic lenses
• This drill-miller has a polished surface which enables a clean cut
• Ideally suitable for perfect drilling and milling of plastic lenses,
including polycarbonate and Trivex
• Material: Tungsten steel
• Shaft size: 3.14 mm
2210 . .
38 mm
Order No.
Drillbit length
Size
2210 08
2210 10
2210 12
2210 14
2210 16
6.0 mm
7.0 mm
7.0 mm
8.0 mm
8.0 mm
0.8 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.4 mm
1.6 mm
C
35
Drill-miller set for plastic lenses
• Contents: 5 drill-miller (0.8; 1.0; 1.2; 1.4 and 1.6 mm)
• Details: See drill-miller above
• Incl. half-transparent plastic box
86 x 10 x 53 mm
43 g
Diamond Drill
• For drilling glass and ceramic
• Working speed: approx. 20,000 rpm
• Shaft size: 2.34 mm
•
•
•
•
2044 . .
2260 . .
Order No.
Drillbit length
Size
2044 10
2044 12
2044 14
7.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.0 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.4 mm
200 %
Diamond Spiral Drill
100 %
200 %
100 %
2210 50
For drilling glass and ceramic
Working speed: 15,000 to 18,000 rpm
Drillbit length: 6.0 mm
Shaft size: 2.34 mm
Order No.
Size
2260 14
2260 16
2260 18
1.4 mm
1.6 mm
1.8 mm
Diamond Wheel
Diamond Miller
• Shaft dimensions: 22 x 0.60 mm
• Working speed: approx. 15,000 to 18,000 rpm
• Shaft size: 2.35 mm
• For milling of lenses
• For use in the screw wizard No. 2886 70
(see page A 39)
• Shaft dimensions: 5.0 x 0.6 mm
• Working speed: approx. 15,000 to 18,000 rpm
• Shaft size: 2.35 mm
2263 00
2264 00
Diamond drill No. 2260 . . plus diamond wheel No. 2263 00 and 2264 00 are high speed tools and should be operated with maximum speed. The optimum
speed is between 15,000 and 18,000 rpm. Use only water as coolant. For minimum wear and tear and best performance apply low pressure only.
Work in intervals and clean drill holes frequently. The lower the rpm of the diamond wheel/drill, the higher the wear and tear. The faster the rpm of the
diamond wheel/drill, the better the working results.
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 35
07.02.14 13:45
Duplex Hinge and Temple
Miller
Double Cone Miller
• To mill a notch for rhinestones
No. 0900 50 and 0900 51.
• For deburring drilling holes in plastic lenses
• Can also be used for polycarbonate and
Trivex.
• Shaft size: 2.34 mm
• For working with joints and temples hinge
rolls on Duplex temples.
• Miller size: 3.0 mm
• Shaft size: 3.0 mm
44.5 mm
200 %
35 mm
200 %
100 %
C
36
100 %
2265. .
2217 03
Miller size
Order No.
1.9 mm
2.3 mm
2.7 mm
4.0 mm
2265 19
2265 23
2265 27
2265 40
Core Miller
• For premilling of hidden hinge bowls
• Miller size: 5.0 mm
• Shaft size: 3.0 mm
23 mm
200 %
100 %
2237 50
Screw End Miller
• Suitable for steel, brass and German
silver screws
• Outer diameter: 1.8 mm
• Inner diameter: 1.4 mm
• Shaft size: 2.34 mm
200 %
37 mm
Please take note of our rhinestone assortment on page F 43.
Hinge Bowl Miller
Long Hole Miller
• 4 cuts
• To mill out the hole for hinge
• Shaft size: 3.0 mm
• For milling long holes in plastic lenses
• Can also be used for polycarbonate
and Trivex
• Shaft size: 2.35 mm
2236 . .
2211 . .
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 36
100 %
44.5 mm
2 pieces
200 %
35 mm
200 %
100 %
100 %
2215 18
Order No.
Miller size
Order No.
Drillbit length
Miller size
2236 30
2236 35
2236 40
2236 45
2236 50
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
4.5 mm
5.0 mm
2211 08
2211 10
2211 12
2211 14
2211 21
3.5 mm
5.5 mm
6.0 mm
6.0 mm
5.5 mm
0.8 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.4 mm
2.1 mm
07.02.14 13:45
Tool Holder
• With plastic handle and revolving plastic knob, especially for taps
• Clamping: 1.5 to 2.0 mm
2062 00
90 mm
10 g
Reamer Holder
C
37
• Brass, nickel-plated
• Clamping: 1.0 to 2.0 mm
2065 00
80 x 6 mm
15 g
Tool Holder
• With 2 exchangeable, hardened steel clamps, with square head
• Clamping: 0.7 to 1.0 and 1.4 to 2.4 mm
2068 00
90 mm
25 g
Precision Tool Holder
•
•
•
•
•
2 exchangeable steel clamps
Black plastic handle with revolving knob
Second clamp accomodated in handle
Additional tools can be stored inside the handle
Clamping: 0 to 1.5 and 1.5 to 2.5 mm
2069 00
100 mm
37 g
Precision Tool Holder
•
•
•
•
With an extra large collet width
For tools with a maximum shaft diameter of 3,2mm
Additional tools can be stored inside the handle
Clamping: 2.5 to 3.2 mm
2070 00
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 37
100 mm
34 g
07.02.14 13:45
Swiss-made and exclusive to B&S
At a quick glance the special quality of the 2 in 1 equalling file
with its two different strokes cannot immediately
be seen. A comparable quality is nowhere to be found.
Precision File
flat, small
Precision File
flat, large
• B & S special design
• With 2 different strokes: Cut 1=
rough and cut 3 = semi fine
• One third of one narrow side
with stroke
• Length of cut: 100 mm
• Suitable handles: No. 1735 90
and 1732 90
• B & S special design
• With 2 different strokes: Cut 1=
rough and cut 3 = semi fine
• Narrow side without stroke
• Length of cut: 100 mm
• Suitable handles: No. 1732 10
and 1735 10
1867 00
1865 00
C
38
143 mm
22 g
1:1
2,8 mm
170 mm
3,2 mm
40 g
1:1
Precision File
flat, small, including handle
• B&S special design
• With 2 different strokes: Cut 1= rough and
cut 3 = semi fine
• One third of one narrow side with stroke
• Delivered with plastic handle
• Length of cut: 100 mm
1868 00
188 mm
2.8 mm
32 g
For cleaning we recommend our cleaning brush for files
No. 3516 00 on page E 30.
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 38
07.02.14 13:45
Precision File
lenticular
Precision File
half-round
Precision File
oval
Raspel
half-round
•
•
•
•
•
• With shaft and pointed tip
• Length of cut: 125 mm
• Suitable handles:
No. 1732 10 and 1735 10
•
•
•
•
•
• For working plastics
• With specially fine rasp
cut No. 5
• Length of cut: 150 mm
• Suitable handles:
No. 1732 10 and 1735 10
Flat oval type with shaft
Tapered pointed tip
Cut: 2
Length of cut: 125 mm
Suitable handles:
No. 1732 10 and 1735 10
Evenly vaulted
With rounded edges
For plastic material
Length of cut: 150 mm
Suitable handles:
No. 1732 10 and 1735 10
C
39
1870 12
175 mm
1878 01 Cut: 1
1882 11 Cut: 1
1878 02 Cut: 2
1882 13 Cut: 3
38 g
175 mm
38 g
205 mm
1:1
1:1
1899 00
33 g
200 mm
55 g
1:1
1:1
File Handles
File Handle, Plastic red
File Handle, Plastic blue
• Lacquered wood
• Standard type, with collar
• Bore: 4 mm
•
•
•
•
Reduces fatigue and avoids blisters
Shaped to fit the hand, special design
For file lengths from 100 up to 150 mm
Material: high impact material with
non-slip surface
• Bore: 4–7 mm, no opening up required
• Material: plastic
• Bore: 4 mm
1735 10
1735 90
1732 90
90 mm
30 g
1732 10
100 mm
35 g
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 39
100 mm
34 g
90 mm
19 g
07.02.14 13:45
C
40
Needle File Assortment
Needle File Assortment
• For work on plastic
• In plastic pouch, different shapes (flat, semicircular, trident,
square type, round, flat with tapered tip)
• Cut: 2
• Length of cut: 70 mm
• Notably small and handy version with extra fine cut for work with plastic
• In plastic pouch, different shapes (flat, semicircular, trident, square type,
round, flat with tapered tip)
• Cut: 3
• Length of cut: 50 mm
1849 60
1848 50
140 mm
6 pieces
100 mm
6 pieces
Needle File Assortment
Diamond Needle File Assortment
• For work on plastic
• In plastic pouch, different shapes (flat, semicircular, trident, square
type, round, flat with tapered tip, lenticular, knife-shaped)
• Assorted in cuts 1 and 3
• For work on steel, lenses, ceramic
• In plastic pouch, different shapes (flat, trident, square type, round, flat
with tapered tip, oval, biretta, lenticular, semicircular, knife-shaped)
• Length of cut: 50 mm
1849 00
1801 50
140 mm
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 40
12 pieces
140 mm
10 pieces
07.02.14 13:45
Needle Files
• Cut: 2
1849 . .
140 mm
2 pieces
1849 61 round
C
41
1849 62 flat
1849 64 trident
1849 65 flat with tapered tip
75 x 9 mm
0.55 mm
120 mm
180 mm
3g
1g
28 g
Screw Head Slot File
•
•
•
•
Without shaft
Cut: 4
Length of cut: 75 mm
Thickness at edge: 0.30 mm
1860 15
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 41
Lens Drill Hole and Hinge
Files
• Round, cylindrical
• Cut: 3
• Length of cut: 100 mm
1853 10
1.1 mm
1853 13
1.4 mm
1853 16
1.6 mm
Ribbed File
• Lenticular
• Cut: 2
1852 02
07.02.14 13:45
Multi-purpose Scissors
• With plastic covered handles for easy cutting
of pattern blanks
• One sided toothed cut (serrated edge)
• We reserve the right to change the colours
1607 00
155 mm
74 g
C
42
Metal Snippers
• With straight jaw and screwed joint
1609 10
175 mm
75 g
Scissor
• Refined stainless steel, adjustable with screw
• Suitable for right and left-use
• We reserve the right to change the colours
1613 00
200 mm
90 g
Scalpel with Metal Handle
•
•
•
•
Practical cutting tool for frame inserts, nylon threads, foils etc
No squeezed edges due to extremely sharp blades
Metal handle with 3 bits
Blade length: 35 mm
1602 10
150 mm
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 42
15 g
Spare Blades for No. 1602 10
1602 15
3 pieces
07.02.14 13:46
Cutting Spoon
• For cutting glass
• Ohlhanns system, handy design, metal type
2637 00
150 mm
30 g
C
43
Glass Cutter
• The traditional “Silberschnitt” superior quality “Made in Germany”
2634 00
130 mm
25 g
Universal Cutting Wheel
• For glass cutter No. 2634 00 and cutting spoon No. 2637 00
• Superior quality “Made in Germany”
2239 00
4.5 mm
12 pieces
Illustration enlarged
Trident Scraper
• Conical, with handle
2071 00
165 mm
25 g
Groove Scraper
• Suitable for rough and smooth surfaces
• Adjustable for each size
• With exchangeable blades
2073 10
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 43
145 mm
40 g
07.02.14 13:46
Pretty flexible.
No DIY store has this bench vice in its range. A bench vice with precise ball joint construction. Work pieces can be rotated and tilted exactly
as required. The exchangeable jaws offer a secure and gentle grip. This German quality product is manufactured in small production runs –
defining a typical B & S product.
Ball Joint Vice
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C
44
With lateral turning range and rotation 360°
Perfect for all demands and requirements at work
Jaw type: smooth and exchangeable
Clamping depth: 38 mm
Jaw width: 50 mm
Clamping range: 48 mm
Maximum thickness of working table: 80 mm
2106 00
1.5 kg
Plastic jaws
• Suitable for No. 2106 00
2117 01
1 pair
Ball Joint Vice
•
•
•
•
•
Adjustable in all kind of work positions
With rubber jaws
Jaw width: 73 mm
Clamping range: 50 mm
Maximum thickness of working table: 55 mm
2105 30
825 g
Filing Vice
Filing Vice
• Aluminium, with rubber block, can be fixed
with screws to any table.
• For filing of temple stops
with its clamp
1726 00
75 x 25 x 25 mm
1724 00
40 g
170 g
Felt Jaws
Aluminium Jaws
• For vice 2106 00, magnetic fixation
• For easy attachment, suitable for all vices
2121 10
2121 15
60 x 8 x10 mm
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 44
16 g
1 pair
65 x 10 x14 mm
33 g
2 pair
07.02.14 13:46
Fret Saw Working Set
Riveting Hammer
• For wood and plastic
• Contents: 1 fret saw, 1 fret saw timber with clamp,
1 set saw blades
• Metal, bi-colour, round heads, 1 side metal, 1 side plastic
2151 00
1772 00
390 g
240 mm
100 g
Spare Screw Set (without illustration)
Riveting Hammer
• Complete with washer and wing nut
• 1 set contains: 2 fly nuts, 2 washers and 2 screws
• Gunmetal finish, round head, wooden handle
2158 01
1781 10
9g
2 pieces
260 mm
80 g
Fret Saw Timber
Optician’s Anvil
• With two clamps and metal sleeve
• Polished chrome-plated,
with round opening, 1 round
and 1 square-shaped drift
2160 00
220 x 14 x 90 mm
C
45
290 g
Spare Clamps (without illustration)
2160 01
2 pieces
1730 10
120 x 45 x 25 mm
425 g
Fret Saw Blades
Fret Saw Timber
• For metal, blue
• Length: 130 mm
• For plastic, all-over cut, black
• Length: 130 mm
2196 . .
each 12 pieces
2199 . .
each 12 s
2196 01
0.5 mm
2199 03
0.8 mm
2199 05
1.0 mm
2196 02
0.7 mm
2199 04
0.9 mm
2199 07
1.2 mm
2196 03
1.0 mm
Chapter_C_Part_2_RZ-V04.indd 45
07.02.14 13:46
D
Measuring Devices
D2
D4
D6
D8
D 10
D 11
D 12
D 14
D 16
Trial Frames
Trial Lens Sets
Cross Cylinders and Test Strips
Tips & Tricks: Prism Foils
Ophthalmic Lenses
Stick-on Reading Segment
Occluders
Lens Clocks and Thickness Gauges
Caliper Gauges and Rulers
The original prize-winning trial frame from Oculus; “Made in Germany” of course!
Hypo-allergenic plastic, easy to use and comfortable to wear; Top workmanship gives this product its renowned quality.
Universal Trial Frame
•
•
•
•
•
•
D
2
Use up to 5 trial lenses (Ø 38 mm)
PD-Range 46 to 80 mm
Measuring device for cornea vertex distance
Temple length and inclination adjustable
Adjustable bridge height and inclination
Fibre strengthened plastic material
(hypo-allergenic)
• Colour: Light grey
4423 00
70 g
For spare parts contact your
local distributor.
Accessories:
Polarised Clip-on
For lateral mounting on the trial frame No. 4423 00.
Polarisation= V-position (45°/135°)
4423 51
1 pair (left and right)
Polarised Clip-on for Testing
Polarisation= V-position (45°/135°)
4458 30
17 g
Universal Trial Frame
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use up to 5 trial lenses (Ø 38 mm)
PD-range 50 to 80 mm
Measuring device for vertex distance
Temple inclination and length adjustable
Bridge height and inclination adjustable at the same time.
Nose pads and temple ends have extra soft quality
Incl. 2 nose pads, size S and M
Colour: Black
Delivered in B & S design box
4427 00
61 g
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
D
3
Universal Trial Frame
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
With improved nose bridge
Use up to 4 trial lenses (Ø 38 mm)
PD-range 48 to 80 mm
Measuring device for vertex distance
Temple inclination and length adjustable
Adjustable bridge height and inclination
Nose pads and temple ends have extra soft quality
Incl. 2 extra nose pads
Colour: Black
Delivered in B & S Design Box
4426 00
80 g
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Universal Trial Frame
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extremely light version
Use up to 3 trial lenses (Ø 38 mm)
PD Adjustments in 2 mm increments from 54 to 74 mm
Temple inclination and length adjustable
Colour: Charcoal grey
Delivered in a plastic box
4424 00
50 g
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Trial Clips
•
•
•
•
Use up to 3 trial lenses (Ø 38 mm)
To be snapped on a frame
Soft plastic buffer on the mounting avoids scratches to lenses
Delivered in a B & S design box
4430 00
19 g
Trial Lens Set with 268 Trial Lenses
with Metal Rims
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
40 pairs of plus and minus lenses
21 pairs of plus and minus cylinders
14 prism lenses
10 accessory lenses
In high quality metal case
Suitable for standard trial frames with 38 mm lenses
All lenses are individually available
4369 05
54 x 10 x 35 cm
6.6 kg
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
D
4
Trial Lens Set with 260 Trial Lenses
with Metal Rims and AR-Coating
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
39 pairs of plus and minus lenses
20 pairs of plus and minus cylinders
14 prism lenses
10 accessory lenses
In high quality metal case
Suitable for standard trial frames with 38 mm lenses
All lenses are individually available
4369 10
54 x 10 x 35 cm
6.6 kg
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Trial Lens Set with 260 Trial Lenses
with Plastic Rims
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
39 pairs of plus and minus lenses
20 pairs of plus and minus cylinders
14 prism lenses
10 accessory lenses
In high quality metal case
Suitable for standard trial frames with 38 mm lenses
All lenses are individually available
4369 20
54 x 10 x 35 cm
5.5 kg
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
Trial Lens Set with 159 Trial Lenses
with Metal Rims
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
25 pairs of plus and minus lenses
11 pairs of plus and minus cylinders
8 prism lenses
7 accessory lenses
In high quality metal case
Suitable for standard trial frames with 38 mm lenses
All lenses are individually available
4369 40
52.5 x 6.8 x 30 cm
5 kg
For spare parts contact your local distributor.
D
5
Upgrade Trial Lens Set, with 8 pcs of 0.12 dpt.
Trial Lenses with Metal Rims
•
•
•
•
1 pair of plus and minus lenses
1 pair of plus and minus cylinder
Suitable for standard trial frames with 38 mm lenses
All lenses are individually available
4369 02
22 x 2.5 x 12.5 cm
142 g
Upgrade Trial Lens Set, with 8 pcs of 0.12 dpt.
Trial Lenses with Plastic Rims
•
•
•
•
1 pair of plus and minus lenses
1 pair of plus and minus cylinder
Suitable for standard trial frames with 38 mm lenses
All lenses are individually available
4369 22
22 x 2.5 x 12.5 cm
114 g
Everything at a glance.
Proven quality from Germany, very handy and light.
Cross Cylinder
Hardened.
25 mm
12 g
4367 . .
4367 20 ± 0.25 dpt.
D
6
4367 40 ± 0.50 dpt.
Cross Cylinder
35 mm
25 g
437. . .
4370 25 ± 0.25 dpt.
4370 50 ± 0.50 dpt.
4370 75 ± 0.75 dpt.
4371 00 ± 1.00 dpt.
Confirmation Test
Effect in diopters: Sph. ± 0.25 dpt.
35 mm each
25 g
4372 00
Binocular Confirmation Test
Effect in diopters: Sph. ± 0.25 dpt.
Adjustment of PD: 46 to 82 mm
35 mm each
4374 00
72 g
Power testing bar
Effect in diopters: Sph. ± 0.25 up to ± 0.50 dpt.
4366 00
19 mm each
40 g
Power testing bar
Effect in diopters: Sph. ± 0.25 up to ± 0.50 dpt.
Delivered in B & S Design Box
4373 00
21 mm each
D
7
Power Testing Bar Assortment
4 wooden bars in a matching wooden case.
Effect in diopters: Sph. ± 0.5 up to ± 3.5 dpt. and ± 4.0 up to ±12.0 dpt.
4373 50
21 mm each
50 g/bar
Occluder
For cover test
Total length: 24.5 cm
4375 00
6 cm
21 g
Ishihara Colour Chart
Matsubara Colour Chart for Children
Book type, 14 charts.
Size: DIN A5
Book type, 10 charts, incl. 6 matching plates.
Size: DIN A5
4476 10
250 g
4476 20
275 g
Tips & Tricks
Attach Prism Foils
Properly
Get the
Right Base
Position!
D
8
Prism Foils
No. 0639 . . or 0640 . .
Multi-purpose Scissors
No. 1607 00
Foil Pen
No. 2628 01
approx. 2–3 minutes
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
This is how it works
Unpacking
Recognizing the base
Attaching
1
2
3
Unpack the prism foil.
From a side view you can recognize
little prisms. The vertical of this prism
is the base.
Attach the prism foil with the smooth side
onto the back of the lens. Orient the axis of
the base with an axis layout.
Marking
Cut out
Moisten
4
5
6
Mark the shape of the lens on the foil.
To avoid needless markings please use only
foil pen 2628 01.
Cut out the shape.
Attaching
Smoothing
7
8
Attach the foil on the back of the lens.
Moisten the lens with a drop of water.
Smoothen the foil, avoid air bubbles.
TIP: Clean the foil only with water. Don’t use any aggressive cleaning agents as the foil would lose its clearness and become dull.
D
9
Tips & Tricks
Attach Prism Foils Properly – page D 8 and D 9
ATTENTION: Storing period for lens foils max. 1 year.
Please mark foils only with tallow or wax pencils!
3M Ophthalmic Lenses
•
•
•
•
0639 . .
Prismatic additions for squint treatment
Highly transparent material with perfect optical quality
High flexibility, good adhesion and image quality
Useful diameter: 66 mm
D
10
Ophthalmic Lenses
Order No.
cm/m
Order No.
cm/m
Order No.
cm/m
0639 01
0639 02
0639 03
0639 04
0639 05
0639 06
1
2
3
4
5
6
0639 07
0639 08
0639 09
0639 10
0639 12
0639 15
7
8
9
10
12
15
0639 20
0639 25
0639 30
0639 35
0639 40
20
25
30
35
40
Order No.
cm/m
Order No.
cm/m
Order No.
cm/m
0640 01
0640 02
0640 03
0640 04
0640 05
0640 06
1
2
3
4
5
6
0640 07
0640 08
0640 09
0640 10
0640 12
0640 15
7
8
9
10
12
15
0640 17
0640 20
0640 25
0640 30
0640 35
17.5
20
25
30
35
0640 . .
• Prismatic additions for squint treatment
• Useful diameter: 58 mm
3M Lens Foils
•
•
•
•
0646 . .
Spherical additions
Highly transparent material with perfect optical quality
Useful diameter: 66 mm
Center thickness: 0.8 mm
Lens Foils
Order No.
Effect dpt.
Order No.
Effect dpt.
0646 10
0646 15
0646 20
+ 1.0
+ 1.5
+ 2.0
0646 25
0646 30
0646 35
+ 2.5
+ 3.0
+ 3.5
0647 . .
• Spheric additions
• Useful diameter: 58 mm
Order No.
Effect dpt.
Center thickness
0647 10
0647 15
0647 20
0647 25
0647 30
+ 1.0
+ 1.5
+ 2.0
+ 2.5
+ 3.0
1.012 mm
1.1 mm
1.1 mm
1.1 mm
1.1 mm
Stick-on Reading Segment
… in protective goggles
Multiple application …
… in sunglasses
… in diving masks
3M
OPTX 20/20
• Flexible plastic
• Reusable self adhesive
• Easy to handle
• Flexible plastic
• Reusable self adhesive
• Easy to handle
28 x 16 mm
31 x 17 mm
1 pair
D
11
1 pair
0638 . .
0637 . .
+ 1.00
0637 10
+ 1.25
0638 12
+ 1.50
0637 15
+ 1.50
0638 15
+ 2.00
0637 20
+ 1.75
0638 17
+ 2.50
0637 25
+ 2.00
0638 20
+ 3.00
0637 30
+ 2.50
0638 25
+ 4.00
0637 40
+ 3.00
0638 30
3M 0637 . .
3M Assortment
OPTX 20/20 Assortment
• 12 packets of reading segments
• 2 packets per diopter
• 12 packets of reading segments
• 2 packets per diopter
12 pairs
12 pairs
0638 99
0637 50
OPTX 20/20 0638 . .
Bed Specs – to Read Lying Down
• Incl. soft case
• Also available as overspecs
4397 20 Black, Standard
75 g
4397 21 Black, Overspecs
85 g
Occluder
• Skin friendly, very elastic plastic
• Easy to adjust, with effective ventilation
• Strong small sucker
4439 80
75 x 50 mm
D
12
of the sucker 15 mm
Occluder
• As No. 4439 80, but small type
4439 90
35 x 35 mm
of the sucker 15 mm
3 pieces
Occluder
• As No. 4439 80, but small and flat type
4439 95
55 x 45 mm
of the sucker 15 mm
3 pieces
Occlusion Foils in Different Types
Based on Prof. Bangerter and Prof. Lang, in graded transparency for reducing the vision.
For full, alternating or gradual occlusion note the instructions from the doctor.
Foils in Sheet Form
10 individual foils can be cut from one foil in order to equip 10 children’s spectacles. The foils can
be cut using scissors. A larger surface can be covered for special applications.
0658 . .
215 x 105 mm
Order No.
Foil
Visus
reduction
Order No.
Foil
Visus
reduction
0658 20
0658 00
0658 10
0658 09
With motifs
Beige
Grey
Translucent
0658 07
Colourless
Full
Full
Full
Light
perception
< 0.1
0658 01
0658 02
0658 03
0658 04
0658 06
0658 08
Colourless
Colourless
Colourless
Colourless
Colourless
Colourless
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
Single Foils
0659 . .
60 x 60 mm
Order No.
Visus reduction
Order No.
Visus reduction
0659 00
0659 09
0659 07
0659 01
0659 02
Full
Light perception
< 0.1
0.1
0.2
0659 03
0659 04
0659 06
0659 08
0659 10
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Single Foils with Funny Motives
for Squint Treatment of Children
Visus reduction: Full
0659 . .
60 x 60 mm
Order No.
Motifs
Order No.
Motifs
0659 20
0659 22
Lady Bird
Globi with bicycle
0659 24
0659 25
Clown
Butterfly
D
13
Sapphire equipped Lens Clock
An essential working tool and another quality product, “Made in Germany”. The extremely durable precision lens clock is hand-fitted
into a shockproof metal housing and always produces correct measurement results.
Lens Clock
• For all spheric and astigmatic lenses with refractive index
n 1.52 and n 1.70
• With sapphire ball tips to prevent scratching of lenses
during measuring process
• Measuring range: 0 to ± 20 dpt.
• Weight: 80 g
• Delivered in a case
D
14
2315 02
Lens Clock
•
•
•
•
For all spheric and astigmatic lenses with refractive index n 1.53
Measuring range: 0 to ± 20 dpt.
Weight: 62 g
Delivered in B&S Design Box
2315 10
Lens Clock
• For all spheric and astigmatic lenses with refractive index
n 1.49 and n 1.60
• Measuring range: 0 to ± 18 dpt.
• Weight: 62 g
• Delivered in B & S Design Box
2315 20
Sapphire equipped, extra long thickness gauge “Made in Germany”.
With this product you can perfectly measure the lens thickness of even very high minus lenses. The 0-position is adjustable.
Thickness Gauge
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extremely long measuring arms
Ball pointed measuring tips made of Sapphire
0-positioning is adjustable
Including box and adjusting key
Arm depth: 80 mm
Lens thickness: up to 20 mm
Reading: 0.05 mm
Weight: 350 g
Delivered in a neoprene bag
2317 00
Thickness Gauge
Thickness Gauge
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
With long arms and ball pointed measuring tips
Arm depth: 75 mm
Lens thickness: up to 20 mm
Reading: 0.05 mm
Weight: 390 g
Delivered in a plastic box
Arm depth: 45 mm
Lens thickness: up to 10 mm
Reading: 0.05 mm
Weight: 75 g
Delivered in a plastic box
2314 00
2318 00
Thickness Gauge
Thickness Gauge
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sapphire tips
0-positioning is adjustable
Arm depth: 30 mm
Ball ends: Ø 1 mm
Lens thickness: up to 20 mm
Reading: 0.05 mm
Weight: 100 g
Delivered in a plastic box
2319 01
Ergonomic shape
To use as hand or stationary device
0-positioning by rotating the outer ring
Arm depth: 45 mm
Measuring tip: sapphire 3.0 mm
1 turn of needle: 1 mm
Lens thickness: up to 10 mm
Reading: 0.01 mm
Weight: 160 g
Delivered in a plastic box
2313 00
D
15
D
16
Tenth Caliper
Spare Measurement Tips
With brass measuring scale and Teflon tips
Measuring range: 19 mm
Depth of mouth: 34 mm
Weight: 83 g
For tenth caliper No. 2310 03.
2310 03
2310 04
Digital Caliper Gauge
Precison Jaws
Electronic display “mm” and “inch” readings.
Reading: 0.1 mm = 0.004 inch
Battery: round cell 1.5 V
Measuring range: 150 mm
Depth of mouth: 40 mm
Weight: 315 g
For digital calliper No. 2335 00.
For 1.2 and 1.4 mm holes.
2335 00
2335 01
1 pair
Digital Caliper Gauge for Rimless Frames
Includes precision measurement.
With two different pins: 1.2 and 1.4 mm. One pin is positioned in the drilled hole and the other
on the lens edge, giving accurate distance measurement.
2335 50
Pocket Caliper
Stainless steel, matt chrome.
Reading: 1/50 mm and 1/1,000 inches
Measuring range: 150 mm
Depth of mouth: 40 mm
Weight: 170 g
2337 02
Precision work
The B&S test lens with the central overprint of the marking provides a very accurate measurement. In addition the print colour chosen to
increase contrast, makes it easier to read the values. The consistent quality of the printing is guaranteed by the German manufacturer.
B&S Test Lens
With milled centre holes, reference lines to mark the centre of the pupil and segheight,
easy to use.
Compatible with Rodenstock and Essilor systems.
2359 02
68 x 0.5 x 68 mm
200 pieces
2359 04
68 x 0.5 x 68 mm
50 pieces
Segheight Gauge
Transparent, scale printed in white.
2371 02
75 x 37 mm
2 pieces
A very special workplace:
To simplify the assembly and adjustment of spectacles. The magnetic surface helps to prevent screws and nuts from bouncing off.
The aluminum edge gives a secure grip on the workbench and prevents slipping. The printed measurement lines makes determining
the frame curvature easier and helps during the adjustment of the frame.
Magnetic Mat for Rimless Work
Work base for the workshop.
Ideal for aligning all frames, in particular when assembling rimless spectacles.
• The magnetic effect retains screws and nuts (minimises bouncing of small items when dropped)
• Measuring line system for determining the frame curvature on sunglasses and sports frames
with extremely curved lenses
• Reference lines for aligning all frames
• Centration aid for determining the frame centre
• An aluminium edge prevents slipping of the mat and serves as support when tightening screws
• Centration aid for temple inclination
• Ruler
• Sizing template to find out the rough lens diameter
• Bold lines to check the markings
2365 21
39.4 x 28 cm
800 g
Formers
Plastic with scale on one side and cross hair on the other side, can be cut with paper scissors.
2395 20
71 x 1.5 x 65 mm
100 pieces
D
17
PD Ruler Transparent
Polycarbonate.
With holes to measure screw threads.
Measuring range: 0–160 mm (mm scale)
Size: 205 x 25 mm
2373 00
3 pieces
Multipurpose PD Ruler
D
18
According to Bremer, plastic, for total PD, monocular PD, segheight,
bridge size and pantoscopic angle.
Measuring range: 0–145 mm (mm scale)
Length: 155 mm
2376 00
PD Ruler
Plastic.
With holes to measure screw threads.
Measuring range: 0–150 mm (mm scale)
Size: 171 x 26 mm
2375 00
3 pieces
PD Ruler
Plastic.
Measuring range: 0–170 mm (mm scale)
Length: 180 mm
2374 00
PD Ruler
Made of anodized aluminium, indelible print.
Measuring range: 0–200 mm (mm scale)
Length: 208 mm
2369 00
Ruler
Metal, flexible, etched scale.
Measuring range: 0–150 mm (mm scale)
Length: 165 mm
2320 01
Angle Measuring Device 180°
Metal.
Angle range: 0–180°
Size: 45 x 174 mm
2366 00
Lens Ruler Base Curve 4 and Base Curve 6
To mark a line on the reverse of lenses.
The lens ruler is essential to draw a marking line due to an adjustment
close to the lens curve.
Size: 70 x 36 mm
2372 00
Fine Line Ruler
To control the axis for uncut lenses, finished lenses and varifocal lenses.
Size: 130 x 18 x 85 mm
2367 00
Axis Layout
According to DIN 58201, Aluminium, etched scale, formulas to
determine prism on decentrated lenses on rear.
Measuring range: 0–170 mm
Size: 175 x 1 x 90 mm
2377 00
D
19
E
Consumables
E2
E8
E9
E 10
E 13
E 16
E 18
E 22
E 24
E 25
E 28
E 30
E 32
E 34
E 36
Lens Blocks and Adhesive Pads
Lens Protection and Anti-Torsion Foil
Anti-Foaming Agent
Abrasive Stones and Lens Marking Pens
Screw Securing and Glues
Disinfectant Wipes
Tips & Tricks: Plasti Dip
Dye
Oils, Cleaners and Flux
Solder
Repair Colours and Repair Pens
Abrasives
Tips & Tricks: Polishing
Buffing Wheels and Brushes
Polishing and Sanding Wax
3
1
Lens Block
4
2
1
2
Adhesive Pad
3
Anti-Torsion Foil
4
Protection Foil (back of the lens)
NIDEK Lens Block Pliable Cup
Flexible lens block for NIDEK machines with original NIDEK pick up.
Due to the larger surface of the lens block the risk of axis distortion is reduced.
Please use the matching B & S adhesive pads No. 2502 17, 2503 17, 2506 17, 2507 17, 2508 17, 2510 17 and 2511 17 only!
E
2
Up to curve 6.
30 x 17mm
10 pieces
3710 17N
30 x 17mm
3710 17R
Red (left lens)
3710 17G
Green (right lens)
3710 50
Mixed colours for right and left
lenses (5x red and 5x green)
10 pieces
For high curves from base 7.
3711 17
NIDEK Lens Block Mini Cup
Flexible lens block for NIDEK machines with original NIDEK Mini pick up. For small and flat shapes only.
Please use the matching B & S adhesive pad No. 2508 15 only!
Up to curve 6.
20 x 15 mm
3714 15
10 pieces
3714 15R
Red (left lens)
3714 15G
Green (right lens)
3714 50
Mixed colours for right and left
lenses (5x red and 5x green)
NIDEK Lens Block Nano Cup
Flexible lens block for NIDEK machine LEX 1000.
For very small and flat shapes. To be used with the complete outer ring.
Please use the matching B & S adhesive pad No. 2503 13 only!
Up to curve 6.
30 x 17mm/18 x 13.5 mm
3715 13R
Red (left lens)
10 pieces
3715 13G
Green (right lens)
3715 13
Mixed colours for right and left
lenses (5x red and 5x green)
E
3
Vario Block
Flexible plastic, for adhesive pads. Suitable for WECO-system.
25 x 20 mm
25 mm
25 x 20 mm
25 mm
10 pieces
25 pieces
10 pieces
25 pieces
3700 20
White
Flat curve
3700 25
White
Flat curve
3701 20
Red
For high plus lenses
3701 25
Red
For high plus lenses
Adhesive pads should not be stored longer than 6–12 months
depending on the material. Storage should be at room temperature (approx. + 18 °C) and with a humidity of approx. 30 %.
Adhesive Pads
for Super Hydrophobic Lenses
• Material: Ethyl vinyl acetate foam
• Including anti-torsion foil
• In a dispenser box
E
4
in mm
Order No.
0.9 mm
2511 14
2511 16
2511 17
2511 19
2511 22
2511 24
Adhesive power
Protection against axis slip
Type
for blocker
2511 14
21 x 14
Universal
2511 16
26 x 16
Universal
2511 17
31 x 17
2511 19
30 x 18
2511 22
22
Universal
2511 24
24
Universal
very high, for
super hydrophobic lenses
NIDEK
very high, including
anti-torsion foil
0.9 mm
2510 17
in mm
2510 17
31 x 17
2510 18
30 x 18
2510 24
24
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
Universal
• Material: Ethyl vinyl acetate foam
• Including anti-torsion foil
• In a dispenser box
Order No.
1 roll (500 pieces)
2510 18
Adhesive power
Protection against axis slip
very high, for
super hydrophobic lenses
high, including
anti-torsion foil
1 roll (500 pieces)
2510 24
Type
for blocker
NIDEK
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
Universal
Universal
Adhesive Pads for Hydrophobic Lenses
• Material: Ethyl vinyl acetate foam
• In a dispenser box
0.9 mm
2507 14
2507 17
1 roll (500 pieces)
2507 18
E
5
2507 22
in mm
Order No.
Adhesive power
2507 24
Protection against axis slip
Type
for blocker
2507 14
21 x 14
2507 17
31 x 17
2507 18
30 x 18
2507 22
22
Universal
2507 24
24
Universal
Universal
NIDEK
very high, for
hydrophobic lenses
very high
• Material: Polyurethane foam
• In a resealable polybag
2508 15
in mm
Order No.
0.9 mm
2508 17
2508 15
22 x 15.5
2508 17
31 x 17
2508 18
18
2508 24
24
Adhesive power
high, for
hydrophobic lenses
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
Universal
2508 18
Protection against axis slip
10 strips (200 pieces)
2508 24
Type
for blocker
NIDEK Mini-Cup
No. 3714 . .
NIDEK
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
high
Universal
Universal
Adhesive Pads for Standard Lenses
•
•
•
•
Material: Ethyl vinyl acetate foam
3M Leap III Adhesive Pads – the original 3M with double pull tabs
In a dispenser box
In a resealable polybag (2503 13)
2503 13
2503 17
Order No.
E
6
in mm
Adhesive power
0.8 mm
2503 18
Protection against axis slip
see table
2503 26
Type
for blocker
NIDEK Nano-Cup
No. 3715 13 (two-piece) 5 strips (100)
NIDEK
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
(pieces)
2503 13
31 x 17
18 x 13.5
2503 17
31 x 17
2503 18
18
Universal
1 roll (1,000)
2503 26
26
Universal
1 roll (1,000)
very high, for
standard lenses
very high
• Material: PVC film
• Comparable with 411 quality (thin very strong line)
• In a dispenser box
0.38 mm
2502 14
2502 17
2502 18
2502 19
2502 20
2502 24
in mm
Order No.
Adhesive power
Protection against axis slip
Type
2502 14
21 x 14
Universal
2502 17
31 x 17
NIDEK
2502 18
18
Universal
2502 19
30 x 18
2502 20
30 x 20
Universal
2502 24
24
Universal
high, for
standard lenses
1 roll (1,000)
see table
for blocker
(pieces)
1 roll (500)
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
1 roll (1,000)
1 roll (1,000)
high
1 roll (500)
Universal
No. 3702 20
1 roll (1,000)
1 roll (1,000)
Adhesive Pads for Standard Lenses
• Material: Polyolefin foam (2501 . .), Polyethylene foam
• In a dispenser box
2506 17
0.9 mm (2501 18)
2501 18
0.8 mm
1 roll (1,000 pieces)
2501 24
E
7
2500 19
2500 24
in mm
Order No.
Adhesive power
Protection against axis slip
Type
for blocker
NIDEK
No. 3710 . . | 3711 17
2506 17
31 x 17
2501 18
18
2501 24
24
2500 19
30 x 18
Universal
2500 24
24
Universal
Universal
high, for
standard lenses
high
Universal
Lens Protection and Anti-Torsion Foil
2560 30
2560 31
2560 32
E
8
2560 35
Order No.
in mm
Product information
Field of application
(pieces)
Anti-torsion foil
2560 30
40 x 28
To protect the front and back of the lens during the edging
process. This protection foil is especially made for lenses
with high-quality coatings. Storing period for adhesive
pads: 6 months.
For lenses with + 4.5 dpt.
on the front surface.
1 roll (500)
2560 31
40 x 26
To protect the front and back of the lens during the edging
process. This protection foil is especially made for lenses
with high-quality coatings. Storing period for adhesive
pads: 6 months.
For lenses with + 4.5 dpt.
on the front surface.
Oval shape for better
handling!
1 roll (500)
2560 32
40 x 26
For high curved lenses. To protect the front and back of
the lens during the edging process. This protection foil
is especially made for lenses with high-quality coatings.
Storing period for adhesive pads: 6 months.
For lenses with high base
curve.
Especially flexible!
1 roll (500)
35
To protect the back of the lens during the edging process.
Lens protection
2560 35
1 roll (1,000)
GECKOlensgrip
• Grip spray for lenses with hydrophobic and clean effect coatings
• Prevents axis slippage during the edging process
• Works additionally as a protective film to reduce the possibility of scratches and can be applied
on the front and back side
• Can easily be removed with conventional cleaning agents
• Dries quickly and is economical in use
2561 00
100 ml
100 x 13 x 25 mm
Environmentally friendly Anti-Foaming Agent
The 100 % ecological compatibility of this item together with its high yield and effectiveness have earned it the B & S title of Top Product.
Proving itself with its first use it does away with any annoying creation of foam during the grinding process. Another positive effect is the
reduced corrosion of machine parts. Especially recommended by the B & S goes Green team.
Anti-Foaming Agent, blue
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prevents foaming during grinding process
Improves the grinding process
Cools and protects machine parts from corrosion
Improves overall care of the machine
Reduces the grinding foam
Rapid decline of dirt particles
Has minimal aerosol development
Contains no hazardous substances, is physiologically safe
Very efficient (100 ml grinding additive for 20 litre water)
E
9
3148 50
500 ml
Anti-Foaming Agent
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prevents foam formation during grinding
Protects machine parts from corrosion
Improves overall care of the machine
Rapid decline of dirt particles
Has minimal aerosol development
Contains no hazardous substances, is physiologically safe
Mixing ratio: 200 ml grinding additive for 20 litre water
3149 00
1,000 ml
Bag Insert for Grinding Water Tank
Made of grey, tearproof plastic.
2900 51
800 x 560 x 0.06 mm
10 pieces
To prevent chemical reactions we recommend changing the water
for the edger every second week.
Whetstone for Hand Edger, green
• Type: Fine
• Field of application: Diamond wheels, fine
3419 00
Abrasive Stones
100 x 8 x 25 mm
40 g
• Colour: Red
• Type: Rough
• Field of application: Diamond wheels of edgers
3422 12
110 x 12 x 25 mm
927 g
12 pieces
831 g
12 pieces
• Colour: White
• Type: Fine
• Field of application: Diamond wheels of edgers
3423 12
E
10
100 x 13 x 25 mm
• Colour: Light blue
• Type: Very fine
• Field of application: Diamond polishing wheel
3424 12
100 x 13 x 25 mm
80 g
Retractable Graphite Pencil
Replacement Leads
• Applicable to foils, spectacle lenses and even surfaces
• White is recommended for dark materials, especially for tinted lenses
• Refillable with leads No. 2624 22 and 2624 55
• Suitable for retractable graphite pencil No. 2624 02 and 2624 05
• In plastic box
2624 02
White
2624 22
White
12 pieces
2624 05
Red
2624 55
Red
12 pieces
Lens Marking Pen
Lens Marking Pen
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Especially for lenses with clean effect coatings
Light, water and abrasion resistant ink
Dries quickly and can be removed with spirit alcohol
Stroke width: 0.8 mm
Tip: round tip
2620 02
White
2 pieces
Especially for lenses with clean effect coatings
Water resistant
Remove colour with spirit alcohol
In a patent-registered box
Two types: fine and super fine
2625 01
Black, fine
4 pieces
2625 05
Red, fine
4 pieces
2627 01
Black, super fine
4 pieces
Universal Pen, Fine
• Waterproof for permanent marking
• With dry safe function – pen can stay open for hours
without running dry
• In a patent-registered box
2623 01
Black
4 pieces
2623 05
Red
4 pieces
Ink Remover Pen
The marking on lenses can be easily removed with this ink remover pen
and can be used on all types of lens material.
2630 00
Foil Pen
Water soluble, smudge-proof foil pen for occlusion foils,
lenses and prism foils.
2628 01
Black
2 pieces
E
11
UV Gel 3184 . .
Use for filling in drill holes accidentally drilled too large or incorrectly.
The gel cures firmly when exposed to the UV lamp
•
•
•
•
Glue cures through UV rays
To use for fitting rimless frames
Transparent, dries very hard
Glue can be drilled once completely hardened
Available as:
a)
UV Gel Applicator
• Perfect for delicate fittings
• Handy, convenient
• No air bubbles in the cannula
E
12
3184 03
Conical shape
for easier
dispensing
3184 03
3 ml
b)
UV Gel Application Bottle
Accessories:
UV Gel Inverted Holder
• Convenient application bottle
• Reclosable
• With application tip for precise dispensing
•
•
•
•
3184 10
3184 09
10 ml
UV glue is always ready for use and can be used up to the last drop
Stable and perfect for immediate use
No air bubbles in the cannula
Supplied without application bottle
40 x 65 x 50 mm
3184 10
3184 09
You will find the UV lamps No. 2430 20 and 2420 10 on page A 47.
Screw Securing
Loctite 221
Loctite 243
• Medium firmness
• Contents: 10 ml
• Colour: Red
• High firmness
• Colour: Blue
3159 00
3161 00
Contents: 10 ml
3161 05
Contents: 50 ml
LOCK AN 302-21
LOCK AN 302-43
• Newly developed Pen-System which enables
pen positioning
• Easy application, clean processing and
improved dosing
• Medium firmness
• Contents: 1 pen 20 ml
• Colour: Red
• Newly developed Pen-System which enables
pen positioning
• Easy application, clean processing and
improved dosing
• High firmness
• Colour: Blue
Comparable with Loctite 243
Comparable with Loctite 221
3160 00
Loctite 259
• Low firmness
• Contents: 50 ml
• Colour: Red
3161 15
3164 00
Contents: 1 pen 10 ml
3164 05
Contents: 1 pen 50 ml
Screw Fastener with
Patented Dispenser Tip
• Low firmness
• Contents: 10 g
• Colour: Blue
3178 00
• The filling level of the glues can vary due to the production process
• The details for the firmness refer to the usage of frame screws and can therefore differ to the manufacturers information
E
13
Instant Adhesive
Loctite 4850
Loctite 460
• Superglue especially for polycarbonate
and Trivex
• Stays flexible after curing
• Colour: Transparent
• Superglue
• Also suitable for polycarbonate and
Trivex lenses
• Contents: 20 g
• Colour: Transparent
Suitable for Progear Eyeguard!
3162 00
Contents: 5 g
3162 02
Contents: 20 g
3162 10
Universal Adhesive
E
14
Loctite 401
Loctite 454 Gel
• All-purpose adhesive
• Contents: 5 g
• Colour: Transparent
• General purpose gel
• Ideal when non-drip application is required or
for use on vertical or overhead surfaces
• Stays correctable for several seconds
• Ideally suited for applying rhinestones
• Contents: 3 g
3162 20
3162 30
Loctite Glass Glue 3494
Loctite Glass Glue 323
• Suitable for fixing correction lenses in
diving masks
• Solvent-free and crystal clear
one-component glue
• For glass and UV permeable plastics
• Contents: 25 ml
• Solvent-free and crystal clear
one-component UV glue
• For a durable bonding of optical elements
like glass and UV permeable plastics
• Flow rate: very high
• Contents: 50 ml
Glass Glues
3181 20
B&S Silicone Adhesive
3181 30
Glass Adhesive
• To glue lenses into all types of frames, also
to be applied as a liquid lining
• Contents: 9 ml
3177 00
A must have for all rimless frames.
Transparent special silicone with a refraction
index of 1.56 allows for the carefree bonding
and padding on drilled spectacles.
• Silicone is 100 % compatible with
all materials
• Maintains its flexibility
• Suitable for polycarbonate and Trivex
• Tested and recommended by
“Flair Modellbrillen”
• Contents: 10 ml
3163 00
Plastic and all Purpose Glues
Super Glue
Solvent for glue
• Newly developed Pen-System which enables
pen positioning
• Easy application, clean processing and
improved dosing
• Area of application: plastics, rubber, metal,
balsa wood, leather
• Final strength after 24 hours
• Not suitable for polycarbonate and
Trivex lenses
• Contents: 1 pen 12 g
• Newly developed Pen-System which enables
pen positioning
• Easy application, clean processing and
improved dosing
• Solvent for all cyanoacrylate glues
• Short curing time
• Not suitable for polycarbonate and
Trivex lenses
• Contents: 1 pen 30 g
3185 12
3185 22
Optivit Set
Superglue Liquid
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Two-Components-Glue
To bond plastic frames (no Optyl)
Short curing time (4–5 minutes)
Contents: 1x 10 ml, 1x 20 ml
3130 03
Solvent-free
Multi-use and economical
Also suitable for polycarbonate
Contents: 3 ml
3183 02
Adhesive SICO MET 40
• Fast curing, solvent-free super glue
with high flow rate
• Sticks together in seconds
• Also suitable for polycarbonate
• Contents: 20 g
3185 30
• The filling level of the glues can vary due to the production process
• The details for the firmness refer to the usage of frame screws and can therefore differ to the manufacturers information
E
15
Disinfectant Wipes – Dispenser
• For cleaning and disinfecting of surfaces of refraction units,
autorefractometers, keratometers, etc.
• Effective spectrum against bacteria, fungus and viruses
(HCV, HIV, Influenza A&B, Polio)
• Skin friendly with a pH-value of 7.0
• 100 pieces: 180 x 125 mm
3154 00
Disinfectant Wipes – Refill Pack
• 100 pieces: 180 x 125 mm
E
16
3154 01
Acetone
•
•
•
•
To bond plastic frames
To clean surfaces
For plastic frames (no Optyl)
Contents: 100 ml
3173 00
Special Cleaner for
Spectacle Lenses
• Cleaner for polycarbonate, plastic and
Trivex lenses
• Ideal for removing residues of the B &S
silicone adhesive No. 3163 00
• Does not cause any damage to the material
• Contents: 100 ml
3175 00
Fluid Dispenser
Fluid dispenser
• Fluid dispenser for acetone, alcohol etc.
• Pump mechanism, can be used with one
hand, reduces odour, plastic HDPE, with
steel cover
• With pre-printed sticky labels
• Capacity: 125 ml
• Fluid dispenser for acetone, alcohol etc.
• Pump mechanism, can be used with
one hand, reduces odour
• PP material with plastic cover
• Capacity: 120 ml
1487 10
1489 00
Plastic Bottle
Glass Beaker for Chemicals
• Material: LDPE
• Capacity: 1 l
• With ground stopper and pipette,
for airtight storage of chemicals
• Capacity: 50 ml
1488 03
1488 04
Stand for Mixing Mould
Mixing Mould
1406 00
1407 00
21 mm
Application Tips
made of Plastic
3 pieces
6 pieces
Application Tips
• For exact dispensing of screw fastener
• Inner diameter: 0.84; 0.5 and 0.41 mm
• Short metal tip for easy dispensing of
super glue
• Long, flexible plastic tip can be shortened
if tip becomes blocked
• Inner diameter: each with 0.84 and 0.25 mm
1405 10
1405 20
3 pieces
4 pieces
E
17
Tips & Tricks
Plasti Dip
Rubber Coating
Scratch
Protection in
a Twinkling
of an Eye!
Plasti Dip
No. 3169 00 , 01, 02, 03
E
18
Thinner
No. 3169 10
Container, syringe,
stirring spoon
approx. 5–10 minutes
without drying period
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
This is how it works
Option 1: Without thinner – for smooth surfaces (e.g. plier tips)
Cleaning
Stirring
Fill in undiluted
1
2
3
Clean the plier thoroughly.
Stir the Plasti Dip carefully, avoid air bubbles!
Dipping
Drying
4
5
Dip the tips of the plier, for a second layer
repeat the dip after 20–30 minutes.
Fill the undiluted Plasti Dip in a container.
E
19
Let the plier dry for 12 hours.
Option 2: With thinner – for uneven surfaces (e.g. tip of the nose pad arm adjusting plier)
Repeat step 1–3
Adding, stirring, dipping, drying
4
Add approx. 2–3 ml thinner by a syringe to
the Plasti Dip filled container. Add more
thinner if needed.
5
Dip the tips of the plier, for a second layer
repeat the dip after 20–30 minutes.
6
Let the plier dry for 12 hours.
TIP: Undiluted Plasti dip can be refilled into the Plasti Dip can. Diluted Plasti Dip can be stored in a lidded can.
Tips & Tricks
Plasti Dip rubber coating – page E 18 and E 19
Plasti Dip – Professional Protection whilst Adjusting Frames
Protects, gives grip and stays flexible
Plasti Dip – Multi-Purpose Synthetic
Rubber Coating
• Can be used on metal, glass, stone and wood
• Air drying synthetic rubber coating
• Easy to apply by dipping or brushing
Starter Set
Contains 3 colours (black, blue and red) and one bottle of thinner.
3169 50
E
20
Plasti Dip
3169 . .
200 g
3169 00
Black
3169 01
Blue
3169 02
Red
3169 03
Transparent
Plasti Dip Thinner
3169 10
250 ml
Lens Deco Pens
To colour lens edges and nylon threads.
For all materials including polycarbonate.
• One pen will colour over 300 lenses
• Air dry for only 20 minutes
• The colour can be removed with the corrector pen at any time,
no time limit
• Simply wipe off the colour with acetone or spirit with the exception
of polycarbonate lenses
2610 . .
• Available in 15 colours plus 1 corrector pen:
Code
Order No.
Colour
Black
4
2610 09
Light turquoise
5341
2610 02
Violet
5310
2610 10
Rose
5617
2610 03
Ochre
5315
2610 11
Bronze
5634
2610 04
Cognac
5326
2610 12
Blue
5636
2610 05
Fuchsia
5328
2610 13
Brown
5340
2610 06
Grey
5330
2610 14
Bordeaux
5333
2610 07
Plum
5331
2610 15
Light blue
5339
2610 08
Dark green
5332
2610 00
Corrector Pen
Order No.
Colour
2610 01
Code
Code
Code
All included in No. 2610 51
Lens Deco Pen Set
• Consisting of 12 pens plus 1 corrector pen
• We reserve the right to change the assortment
2610 51
Clean the lens edge thoroughly with lens cleaner No. 3175 00 or with an ultrasonic cleaning unit before application. For best results do not polish the
lens edge. Shake the pen and gently push in the cartridge to fill with colour. For easy application attach the lens to a lens groover. Use lens cleaner
No. 3175 00 to clean lens after application. Please screw cap on tightly after each use to prevent the pen from drying out.
E
21
Lens Dye Packets
•
•
•
•
Water soluble dye powder for tinting lenses
Ready prepared for 1 litre tinting solution
The powder bag dissolves completely when mixed with hot water
Contents: 10 g
2615 . .
E
22
2615 01
Black
2615 02
Grey green (G-15)
2615 03
Grey blue
2615 06
Brown
2615 11
Dark green
2615 12
Green
2615 16
Dark blue
2615 17
Blue
2615 23
Fuchsia
2615 24
Red
2615 26
Orange
2615 29
Yellow
2615 04
Steel grey
UV Filter Additive
•
•
•
•
•
•
Water soluble powder
To apply an UV filter on lenses
UV-protection to 400 nm
Ready prepared for 0.5 litre tinting solution
The powder bag dissolves completely when mixed with hot water
Contents: 35 g
2616 00
Heat Transfer Fluid
•
•
•
•
Special oil, can be used instead of distilled water
No loss of liquid by evaporation
Especially suitable for frequent use
Contents: 1 l
E
23
2617 00
Neutraliser
• Removes colour from tinted lenses
• Contents: 1 l
2618 00
You will find the tinting unit Tinta 2 for 2 pots No. 2880 01
on page A 48.
Oil Dropper
Made of plastic, with single drop release,
only use acid-free oil No. 3171 00.
Delivered without content.
2740 00
120 mm
Oil
Drill Oil
• For spectacle hinges, high quality, non-acidic
• Contents: 20 ml
• For cooling during drilling
• Contents: 100 ml
3171 00
3170 00
Compressed-Air Spray
Silicone Care Spray
Removes dust and fluff quickly and reliably
from sensitive surfaces and parts which are
not easily accessible.
Applications: Optics, instruments, medical
technology, clock pieces, keyboards, hi-fi,
videos, electrical equipment and model making
Contents: 400 ml
Cleans and protects automatic grinders,
machinery and equipment. Impregnates
rubber, plastic and leather. Repels dirt and
water, eases friction parts. Protects against
corrosion and oxidation.
Important!
Do not allow spray to come into contact with
spectacle lenses.
Contents: 400 ml
3174 15
3174 10
Heatstop
Fluoron
• Isolating paste for all types of soldering
• Consistency: Paste
• Contents: 100 g
• For high temperature soldering
• Consistency: Liquid
• Contents: 100 ml
3029 00
3101 00
E
24
For hard solder and any heavy metal materials, also nickel free:
Braze Tec h 80 Flux
Braze Tec h Flux
• For difficult to process materials, such as
stainless steel
• Leaves no residue on the soldered area
• Consistency: Paste
• Contents: 100 g
• Consistency: Paste
3114 00
3112 00
Contents: 100 g
3112 05
Contents: 500 g
If dried out, welding flux and heat stop can be sprayed with
distilled water.
Silver Solder, white fluid
•
•
•
•
•
For jewellery and frames
To use without additional flux
Metal contents: 56 % Ag
Melting point: 650 °C
Field of application: Jewellery and
metal frames
• Contents: 8 g
white fluid, flux included
3002 00
You will find the soldering station
No. 2757 00 and equipment
on page A 42.
Solder Dispenser
“Original Degussa”, for Degussa solders
No. 3007 00 and 3040 00.
Opening: 1.8 mm
2059 00
200 mm
20 g
This material can be used whilst welding. Using this material, the welding will last longer.
Silver Palladium Wire
Titanium Wire
Steel Wire
Only for use with spectacle frames with nickel
content, such as monel or German silver.
Material strength: 0.4 mm
Only for use with titanium frames.
Material strength: 0.3 mm
Only for use with stainless steel frames.
Material strength: 0.4 mm
3043 30
3043 10
3043 20
2 à 25 cm
2 à 25 cm
2 à 25 cm
E
25
Solder
Hard Solder silver
Silver Solder Degussa 600 L 3
3003 00
3007 00
Field of application:
Bronze, nickel, stainless steel
Jewellery
Metal contents:
60 % Ag without Cd
60 % Ag without Cd
Melting point:
680 °C
680 °C
Recommended Flux:
3112 . . Braze Tec h
3112 . . Braze Tec h
Form:
0.5 mm wire Ø
0.4 mm wire Ø in dispenser
Sales unit:
5g
2g
Length:
approx. 230 cm
approx. 110 cm
Silver Solder Degussa 6002
without Cd
Phantom Solder
3008 00
3010 00
Field of application:
Jewellery
For practice, also suitable
Metal contents:
60 % Ag, 23 % Cu, 14.5 % Zn, 2.5 % Sn
55 % Ag, Sn
Melting point:
680 °C
660 °C
Recommended Flux:
3112 . . Braze Tec h
3112 . . Braze Tec h
Form:
0.5 mm wire Ø
0.5 mm wire Ø in dispenser
Sales unit:
5.3 g
3g
Length:
approx. 280 cm
approx. 130 cm
E
26
for nickel-free material
Solder wire, white fluid
3014 00
Field of application:
All silver alloy over
800 ‰ fineness
Metal contents:
675 ‰ Au
Melting point:
710 °C
Recommended Flux:
3112 . . Braze Tec h
Form:
0.4 mm wire Ø
Sales unit:
3.5 g
Length:
approx. 230 cm
Gold Solder,
8 Ct
Solder Wire,
yellow fluid
3016 00
3015 00
Jewellery and metal frames
All metals such as silver, nickel, chrome,
of gold alloy
stainless steel, brass, etc.
Metal contents:
333 ‰ Au
55 % Ag, 21 % Cu, 22 % Zn, 2 % Sn
Melting point:
590 °C
660 °C
Recommended Flux:
3101 00 Fluoron
3101 00 Fluoron
Form:
Wire 0.5 mm Ø
Wire 0.4 mm Ø
Sales unit:
1g
5g
Length:
approx. 70 cm
approx. 75 cm
Universal Solder,
yellow fluid
Universal Solder,
white fluid
3020 03
3022 03
yellow fluid, flux included
white fluid, flux included
All metals such as silver, nickel, chrome,
All metals such as silver, nickel, chrome,
stainless steel, brass, etc.
stainless steel, brass, etc.
Metal contents:
50 % Ag
40 % Ag
Melting point:
670 °C
700 °C
Recommended Flux:
Without flux
Without flux
Form:
Tube 1 mm Ø
Tube 1 mm Ø
Sales unit:
3 tubes at 150 mm each
3 tubes at 150 mm each
Pallarium – Universal Solder,
white fluid
Pallarium – Universal Solder,
gold fluid
3023 00
3023 01
white fluid, flux included
gold fluid, flux included
All standard metals such as nickel, silver, chrome,
All standard metals such as nickel, silver, chrome,
stainless steel, gold, brass and others
stainless steel, gold, brass and others.
Light yellow tint, standard quality,
Light yellow tint, standard quality,
equivalent to 20 carat
equivalent to 20 carat
Melting point:
580 °C
580 °C
Recommended Flux:
Without flux
Without flux
Form:
Tube 1 mm Ø
Tube 1 mm Ø
Sales unit:
12 rods at 150 mm each
12 rods at 150 mm each
Field of application:
Field of application:
Field of application:
Metal contents:
E
27
Repair Colours
Coloured quality lacquer for small repairs on frames, for example
re-colouring after soldering. The colours may be mixed. The clear
lacquer can be used for small repairs of protection lacquer and
to optimise the colours.
1 bottle = 12 ml
2611 . .
E
28
• Available in 9 colours plus clear lacquer:
Order No.
Colour
Order No.
Colour
2611 00
White
Code
2611 05
Red
2611 01
Black
2611 06
Yellow
2611 02
Metallic silver
2611 07
Green
2611 03
Metallic gold
2611 08
Brown
2611 04
Blue
2611 09
Clear Lacquer
Repair Colour Set
Consisting of all 9 colours plus clear lacquer.
2611 50
•
•
•
•
•
Thoroughly clean frame parts to be repaired
Shake the bottle well, you must be able to hear the ball bearing
Apply the colour to the desired area
Allow 6 hours to dry
If necessary apply an additional coat of clear lacquer
Code
Repair Pens
With repair pens you can successfully:
• Repair scratches
• Cover solder or welding traces
• Can also be used to cover corrosion caused by perspiration
Usable for metal and plastic frames.
2612 . .
• Available in 12 colours plus 1 corrector pen:
Order No.
Colour
Gloss black
2612 07
Light silver
2612 01
Matt black
2612 08
Light brown
2612 02
Dark blue
2612 09
Dark brown
2612 03
Light blue
2612 10
Protective lacquer clear gloss
2612 04
Rose gold
2612 11
Protective lacquer clear matt
2612 05
Yellow gold
2612 12
Corrector Pen
2612 06
Gunmetal
Order No.
Colour
2612 00
Code
Repair Pen Set
Consisting of 12 pens plus 1 corrector pen.
2612 50
•
•
•
•
•
•
Thoroughly clean the frame part to be repaired
Shake the pen and press the tip in several times until you see the colour come through
Put the colour on the required area
Leave to dry for 10 to 20 minutes. Use a frame heater to dry quicker
A second coat of clear lacquer may be required
Not appropriate for paint coats that have received heat treatment
Code
E
29
Brass Cleaning Brush
• Core: Metal
• Bore Ø: Conical
• Weight: 25 g
3506 00
50 mm
10 mm
Diamond Tool Cleaner
Pencil shaped; a bundle of 1,500 finest steel
wires guarantees the cleaning of drill bits,
millers and diamond drill bits. The grade
is adjustable.
E
30
3501 00
120 mm
Filing Brush
Flat.
• Dimensions (w x d): 250 x 35 mm
• Coated surface: 105 mm
3516 00
Abrasive Paper
• Dimensions (w x d): 230 x 280 mm
• 1 pack = 5 sheets
3251 . .
3251 18
Granulation: 180
3251 24
Granulation: 240
3251 32
Granulation: 320
3251 40
Granulation: 400
3251 60
Granulation: 600
3251 80
Granulation: 800
Abrasive Rubber
To clean solder points, to dull metals and plastic.
• Dimensions (w x h x d): 80 x 20 x 50 mm
3412 . .
3412 01
Granulation: Rough
3412 02
Granulation: Medium
3412 03
Granulation: Fine
Marking Needle
•
•
•
•
•
With hard metal tip
Ball pen type
Retracts for safety
Black plastic grip to optimise the handling
Spare tips available
2302 00
117 mm
Tips for Marking Needle
• Hard metal spare tips
2302 10
2 pieces
Sanding Pen
The ideal tool for preprocessing and reworking soldering and
welding points.
• For cleaning soldering and welding points difficult to access
• Available with sanding insert (fine or rough grit) or glass fibre leads
• The fine grit removes a small amount of material
and leaves a matt surface, acts on metal surfaces as if polished
• The rough grit removes more material and leaves a matt surface
• Easy handling and cleaning with the glass fibre lead by using it
like a brush
3290 01 Sanding pen fine with holder
3290 03 Sanding pen rough with holder
3290 05 2 glass fibres leads (with holder)
3290 11 Sanding insert fine (without holder)
3290 13 Sanding insert rough (without holder)
3290 15 Glass fibre lead (without holder)
3290 15
3290 11
3290 13
Grinding Sponge Disc
•
•
•
•
•
With plastic adaptor in 10 and 20 mm
Granulation: 46
Max. speed: 4,780 rpm
Bore Ø: 10 mm, 20 mm
Weight: 260 g
3426 10
100 mm
20 mm
2 pieces
E
31
Tips & Tricks
Perfectly Polished
Buffing Wheel?
+ Polishing Wax?
= The
Combination
is Important!
E
32
This is how it works
ACETATE, OPTYL, CELLULOID, PROPIONATE
Rough polishing
Grinding wax
3120 00
Buffing wheel, wool cone
3416 10, 3474 00
Fine polishing
Polishing wax
3122 00, 3118 00
Buffing wheel, wool cone
3416 10, 3474 00
High gloss polishing
Burnishing wax
3125 00,
3118 00
Buffing wheel, wool cone
3470 01, 3471 00, 3472 00,
3561 00, 3582 00, 3571 00
Information:
Plastic:
Cutting speed 6 and 24 m/s
Thermoplastics and other heat sensitive plastics:
Cutting speed 15 m/s
Thermosetting plastics (Optyl):
Cutting speed 15 m/s
Definiton:
The cutting speed is the speed at which the tool lip penetrates the
material, also known as peripheral speed. For grinding and polishing
machines, this speed is measured in m/s. The cutting speed is
determined by the speed of the machine and the tool diameter.
It is important for a smoothly processed surface.
LENS EDGE POLYCARBONATE
Lens polishing
Polishing paste
3127 00
Felt cloth buff
3457 00
It is calculated as follows:
Cutting speed (v) in meter per second (m/s) equals diameter (d)
in meters (m) x π x times speed (n) divided by 60;
Formula: v = d x π x n / 60
LENS EDGE CR 39, TRIVEX, PNX
Rough polising
Polishing paste
3128 00, 3129 01
Felt discs
3455 10, 3450 00, 3456 00
Fine polishing
Polishing paste
3128 00, 3129 01
Felt cloth buff
3474 00, 3457 00
METAL
Fine polishing
Polishing wax
3143 00
WHEEL DIAMETER (MM)
Buffing wheels
3471 00, 3470 01, 3472 00,
3474 00, 3416 10
Buffing wheels
3471 00, 3470 01, 3472 00,
3474 00, 3416 10
SPINDLE SPEED (RPM)
Rough polising
Polishing wax
3144 00
100 125 150 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 1000
300
16
600
11 13 14 16 19 31
800
11 13 15 17 19 21 25 42
1400
11 13 15 18 22 26 29 23 37 44
1600
13 15 17 21 25 29 33 38 42 50
1800 12 14 17 19 24 28 33 38 42 47 56
2000 10 13 16 18 21 26 31 36 42 47 52
2200 12 14 17 20 23 29 35 40 46 52 58
2400 13 15 19 22 25 31 38 44 50 57
BAKELITE, HORN, CAOUTCHOUC, METAL
without any wax
Leather buffing wheel
3462 00
2600 14 17 20 24 27 34 41 48 53
2800 15 18 22 26 29 37 44 51 58
3000 16 20 24 28 31 39 47 55
E
33
Tips & Tricks
Perfectly Polished – page E 32 and E 33
Felt Buffing Wheel
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: Conical
• Core: Centered
• Bore Ø: 8 mm
3450 00
3418 00
100 mm
Felt Disc, conical
shaped Soft Set Felt
15 mm
Felt Disc
100 mm
20:5 mm
Felt Disc
with Groove
• Core: Centered
• Bore Ø: 10 mm
• Core: Centered
• Bore Ø: 10 mm
E
34
3455 10
100 mm
3456 00
25 mm
100 mm
25 mm
Felt Cloth Buff
for Polycarbonate
Leather Buffing
Wheel
To extend service life the red rings
can be separated individually.
The felt cloth buff in combination
with the polishing wax
No. 3127 00, is perfectly suited
for polishing Polycarbonate
lenses – optimum speed for the
treatment of Polycarbonate:
approx. 1,500 rpm.
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: Conical
No. 3462 00 is especially suitable
for the final polishing of metal
rubber, paladon, bakelite, horn etc.
Use the wheel dry without any
polishing compound.
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: Conical
3457 00
3462 00
80 mm
25 mm
90 mm
6 mm
Muslin Buffing
Wheel
Muslin Buffing
Wheel
• Core: Leather
• Bore Ø: 6 mm
• Core: Leather
• Bore Ø: 6 mm
3470 01
3471 00
125 mm
12 mm
125 mm
24 mm
Tips & Tricks
Perfectly Polished – page E 32 and E 33
Flannel Buffing
Wheel
Silicone Impregnated
Muslin Wheel
• Core: Leather
• Bore Ø: 6 mm
This silicone impregnated fabric
structure offers significant advantages: it increases the life of the
buffing wheel, due to elimination
of fluff. They require less pressure
during the polishing process and
save 50 % on polishing paste.
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: 6 mm
3474 00
125 mm
30 mm
Buffing Wheel
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: 8 mm
3416 10
100 mm
3472 00
10 mm
100 mm
Wool Brush
Wool Brush
• Core: Wood
• Bore Ø: 6 mm
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: Conical
3561 00
3582 00
70 mm
35 mm
80 mm
12 mm
25 mm
Yarn Brush
Wool Cone
• Core: Plastic
• Bore Ø: Conical
The wool cone is manufactured
in such a way that it can be
mounted on a conical polishing tip.
A different kind of fixing is not
available. Due to the length of the
axis unbalanced run may occur.
• Core: Wood
• Bore Ø: Conical
3575 00
3571 00
90 mm
20 mm
To prevent polishing buffs from fraying these can be napped
before first use using a sharp object. However due to the
properties of the material cotton cloth is not completely free
of fluff.
For all buffing wheels with plastic core
Plastic cores have conical borings. While attaching to the
polishing tip, the cone of the tip and the boring have to match.
30:15 mm
70 mm
Corresponding to the “European Safety Regulations for the
correct use of grinding wheels” the following has to be
observed:
1. Wheels with a total diameter of 100 mm or more have to be
flanged ⅔ on both sides.
2. The maximum running speed has to be observed.
3. During operation safety goggles (see catalogue page A 51
and the whole range in the accessories catalogue) have to
be worn.
E
35
Tips & Tricks
Perfectly Polished – page E 32 and E 33
Please take note of our new small tools assortment including the silicone polisher No. 2240 57 on page C 31.
Polired
3143 00
E
36
Applications with approx. 2,800 rpm:
Buffing and smooth polishing:
Cloth buffing wheels
Field of application:
Gold, steel
Weight:
approx. 60 g
Poligreen
Poliblue
3144 00
3145 00
Buffing and smooth polishing:
Buffing and smooth polishing:
Cloth buffing wheels
Cloth buffing wheels
Field of application:
White metals
Plastic and caoutchouc rubber
Weight:
approx. 60 g
approx. 60 g
Polishing Paste
Chamois Polishing Paste
• Finest polishing compounds
• High amount of grease: smears
more easily and cools off faster
• Finest polishing compounds
• Grease free: has no cooling
effect during polishing
3128 00
3129 01
Applications with approx. 2,800 rpm:
High gloss polishing: Cloth buffing wheels
High gloss polishing: Cloth buffing wheels,
Field of application:
CR 39, precious metals
CR 39, precious metals
Weight:
approx. 50 g
approx. 100 g
Applications with approx. 2,800 rpm:
wool wheels
For No. 3128 00 and 3129 01
Finest polishing compounds contain an especially fine and treated polishing powder. The speed of the polishing machine should be very slow and you
should use felt discs.
Tips & Tricks
Perfectly Polished – page E 32 and E 33
Grinding Wax, brown
Polishing Wax, blue
3120 00
3118 00
Rough polishing: Cloth buffing wheels
Buffing and smooth polishing:
(approx. 2,300 rpm)
Wool wheels, cloth buffing wheels
Field of application:
Plastic
Plastic, optyl
Weight:
approx. 200 g
approx. 700 g
Burnishing Wax, beige
Burnishing Wax, beige
3122 00
3125 00
Smooth polishing: Wool wheels,
High glossing polishing: Wool wheels
Applications with approx. 2,800 rpm:
Applications with approx. 2,800 rpm:
cloth buffing wheels
Field of application:
Plastic
Plastic
Weight:
approx. 200 g
approx. 200 g
Polishing Wax, blue, for Polycarbonate
The polishing paste is a high gloss polishing paste with “Diamantine” being perfectly suited for polishing
Polycarbonate lenses as well as for the materials Titanium, Platinum and Palladium. The best polishing
results will be achieved with the felt cloth No. 3457 00 which has a patented conical flange (refer to page
E 34).
3127 00
Applications with approx. 2,800 rpm:
High gloss polishing: Felt cloth buffing wheel,
wool wheels
Field of application:
Polycarbonate, Titanium, Palladium, Platinum
Weight:
approx. 100 g
E
37
F
Spectacle Frame Parts
F2
F 14
F 16
F 18
F 20
F 46
F 50
F 54
F 62
F 68
F 69
F 70
F 75
F 76
F 77
F 79
Overview: Nose Pads
Tips & Tricks: Nose Pad Arms
Nose Pad Arms
Nose Pad Cushions
Overview: Screws and Nuts
Washers and Sleeves
Hinges
Overview: Temples and Temple Ends
Tips & Tricks: Sport Temple Ends
Shrinking Tubes
Long Temple Ends
Temples
Spare Temples and Bridges for Rimless Frames
Lens Washer
Nylon Threads
Exercise Samples for Trainees
The B&S Nose Pad Range:
Extensive selection.
For all applications.
Easy to find simple to order.
F
2
Ordering in 3 Steps
1. Select the material (content on the right)
2. Select size and shape
3. Select mounting type
Mounting Systems
Push-in System
Screw-in System
&
Worth Knowing
•
•
•
•
The Icons guarantees:
High-quality basic materials
Maximum durability and optical transparency
Colour stability
No flashes
•
•
•
•
•
Premium Nose Pads Made in Germany offers:
PVC nose pads without phthalate containing plasticiser
Small cast points for better wear comfort
Rounded edges
High dimensional accuracy and high quality of the composite materials
Certified according to ISO 9001
Overview for Simple Selection
Silicone Nose Pads
• Round and Classic
• Symmetrical Nose Pads
• Ultra Slim, Symmetrical Nose Pads
F4
F 4, 5
F5
Silicone Nose Pads and PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft
•
•
•
•
•
Saddle Bridges
Primadonna System
Air Titanium and Minimal Art
“System 3”
“System 3 Dash M”
F6
F6
F7
F7
F7
PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft, with Plastic Insert
• Transparent
• Transparent, Thin Type
F8
F8
F
3
PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft, with Metal Insert
• Silver
• Gold
F9
F9
Plastic Nose Pads, Hard
• Ultra slim
• With Plastic Insert
F 10
F 10
Comfort Nose Pads
• Air Active
• Biofeel
F 11
F 11
Hypo-allergenic Special Nose Pads
• Glass
• Titanium
F 12
F 12
Special Nose Pads and Nose Bridges
• Nose Pads for Special Applications
• Silicone Nose Bridges
• Nose Pad Cushions
F 13
F 13
F 18, 19
Silicone Nose Pads
Round and Classic, “Push-in” System
9.0 mm
15.0 mm
17.0 mm
F
4
Round and Classic, “Screw-in” System
0278 09
20 pieces
0288 09
20 pieces
0278 09-50
50 pieces
0288 09-50
50 pieces
0278 09-100
100 pieces
0288 09-100
100 pieces
0278 09-200
200 pieces
0288 09-200
200 pieces
0216 15
10 pairs
0226 15
10 pairs
0216 15-25
25 pairs
0226 15-25
25 pairs
0216 15-50
50 pairs
0226 15-50
50 pairs
0216 15-100
100 pairs
0226 15-100
100 pairs
0216 15-250
250 pairs
0226 15-250
250 pairs
0216 17
10 pairs
0226 17
10 pairs
0216 17-25
25 pairs
0226 17-25
25 pairs
0216 17-50
50 pairs
0226 17-50
50 pairs
0216 17-100
100 pairs
0226 17-100
100 pairs
0216 17-250
250 pairs
0226 17-250
250 pairs
0216 19
10 pairs
0226 19
10 pairs
0216 19-25
25 pairs
0226 19-25
25 pairs
9.0 mm
0216 19-50
50 pairs
0226 19-50
50 pairs
0216 19-100
100 pairs
0226 19-100
100 pairs
0216 19-250
250 pairs
0226 19-250
250 pairs
Symmetrical Nose Pads, “Push-in” System
0227 10
20 pieces
0227 10-50
50 pieces
0227 10-100
Symmetrical Nose Pads, “Screw-in” System
0228 10
20 pieces
0228 10-50
50 pieces
100 pieces
0228 10-100
100 pieces
0227 10-200
200 pieces
0228 10-200
200 pieces
0237 10
20 pieces
0238 10
20 pieces
0228 13
20 pieces
0228 13-50
50 pieces
10.0 mm
13.0 mm
17.0 mm
19.0 mm
19.0 mm
10.0 mm
15.0 mm
10.0 mm
10.0 mm
0227 13
20 pieces
0227 13-50
50 pieces
0227 13-100
100 pieces
0228 13-100
100 pieces
0227 13-200
200 pieces
0228 13-200
200 pieces
13.0 mm
Silicone Nose Pads
Symmetrical Nose Pads, “Push-in” System
14.5 mm
16.0 mm
18.0 mm
0227 15
20 pieces
0227 15-50
50 pieces
0227 15-100
Symmetrical Nose Pads, “Screw-in” System
0228 15
20 pieces
0228 15-50
50 pieces
100 pieces
0228 15-100
100 pieces
0227 15-200
200 pieces
0228 15-200
200 pieces
0227 16
20 pieces
0228 16
20 pieces
0227 16-50
50 pieces
0228 16-50
50 pieces
0227 16-100
100 pieces
0228 16-100
100 pieces
0227 16-200
200 pieces
0228 16-200
200 pieces
0227 18
20 pieces
0228 18
20 pieces
0227 18-100
100 pieces
0228 18-100
100 pieces
0227 18-200
200 pieces
0228 18-200
200 pieces
14.5 mm
16.0 mm
18.0 mm
F
5
Ultra Slim, Symmetrical Nose Pads,
“Push-in” System
9.0 mm
13.0 mm
15.0 mm
Ultra Slim, Symmetrical Nose Pads,
“Screw-in” System
0219 09
20 pieces
0229 09
20 pieces
0219 09-50
50 pieces
0229 09-50
50 pieces
0219 09-100
100 pieces
0229 09-100
100 pieces
0219 13
20 pieces
0229 13
20 pieces
0219 13-50
50 pieces
0229 13-50
50 pieces
0219 13-100
100 pieces
0229 13-100
100 pieces
0219 15
20 pieces
0229 15
20 pieces
0219 15-50
50 pieces
0229 15-50
50 pieces
0219 15-100
100 pieces
0229 15-100
100 pieces
9.0 mm
13.0 mm
15.0 mm
Silicone Nose Pad Assortment
In organiser boxes No. 1458 20 (see catalogue page G 6).
Contents: 12 of the most used silicone nose pads and nose bridges,
altogether 152 pieces
We reserve the right to change the assortment.
0200 10
Our small parts organiser
boxes can be found
on pages G 6 and G 7.
210 g
Silicone Nose Pads and PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft
9 pieces
0225 16
3 pieces
0225 16-9
9 pieces
m
0225 12-9
m
3 pieces
Saddle Bridges Silicone, “Screw-in” System
3 pieces
23.3 mm
0235 12-9
9 pieces
0235 16
3 pieces
0235 16-9
9 pieces
0235 18
3 pieces
0235 18-9
9 pieces
0235 20
3 pieces
0235 20-9
9 pieces
0235 22
3 pieces
0235 22-9
9 pieces
16.0
16.0
mm
mm
23.3 mm
26.5 mm
26.5 mm
28.5 mm
m
0
0.
m
0225 18
3 pieces
0225 18-9
9 pieces
0225 20
3 pieces
0225 20-9
9 pieces
0225 22
3 pieces
0225 22-9
9 pieces
28.5 mm
m
.0
m
20
30.5 mm
22
22
.0
m
m
30.5 mm
m
.0
2
m
0
.
18
m
m
m
m
0
.
18
F
6
0235 12
12
.0
0225 12
12
.0
m
m
Saddle Bridges Silicone, “Push-in” System
36.5 mm
36.5 mm
Primadonna System Silicone
Primadonna System PVC
0280 09
20 pieces
0212 13
20 pieces
0212 13-100
100 pieces
0212 15
10 pairs
0212 15-50
50 pairs
0212 17
10 pairs
0212 17-50
50 pairs
9.0 mm
13.0 mm
14.5 mm
17.0 mm
13.0 mm
14.5 mm
17.0 mm
0213 13
20 pieces
0213 13-100
100 pieces
0213 15
10 pairs
0213 15-50
50 pairs
0213 17
10 pairs
0213 17-50
50 pairs
Silicone Nose Pads and PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft
Air Titanium and Minimal Art Silicone
8.0 mm
9.0 mm
9.5 mm
Air Titanium and Minimal Art PVC
0279 08
20 pieces
0279 08-100
100 pieces
0279 09
20 pieces
0279 09-100
100 pieces
0279 10
20 pieces
0279 10-100
100 pieces
0271 09
20 pieces
0271 11
20 pieces
9.5 mm
11.5 mm
Greater stability due to inserted
plastic pin.
0279 12
20 pieces
12.0 mm
0279 15
20 pieces
0270 11
10 pairs
F
7
15.5 mm
11.0 mm
“System 3” Silicone
“System 3” Silicone
0279 11
0279 41
20 pieces
20 pieces
11.0 mm
11.0 mm
0279 13
20 pieces
“System 3 Dash M” Silicone
12.5 mm
0276 11
20 pieces
11.0 mm
0279 21
20 pieces
11.0 mm
0277 11
20 pieces
11.0 mm
0279 31
11.0 mm
20 pieces
With modified, movable base for better comfort.
The suitable pad arm is shown on page F 18, No. 0276 01.
PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft, with Plastic Insert
Transparent, “Push-in” System
Transparent, “Screw-in” System
0272 09
20 pieces
0272 09-100
100 pieces
9.0 mm
13.0 mm
14.5 mm
F
8
20 pieces
0273 09-100
100 pieces
9.0 mm
0272 09-200
200 pieces
0273 09-200
200 pieces
0272 13
20 pieces
0273 13
20 pieces
0272 13-100
100 pieces
0273 13-100
100 pieces
0272 13-200
200 pieces
0273 13-200
200 pieces
0272 15
10 pairs
0273 15
10 pairs
0272 15-50
50 pairs
0273 15-50
50 pairs
0272 15-100
100 pairs
0273 15-100
100 pairs
0272 17
10 pairs
0273 17
10 pairs
0272 17-50
50 pairs
0273 17-50
50 pairs
13.0 mm
14.5 mm
17.0 mm
17.0 mm
0272 17-100
100 pairs
0273 17-100
100 pairs
0272 19
10 pairs
0273 19
10 pairs
0272 19-50
50 pairs
0273 19-50
50 pairs
0273 19-100
100 pairs
19.0 mm
19.0 mm
0272 19-100
100 pairs
Transparent, “Push-in” System,
Thin Type 1.5 mm
0284 11
Transparent, “Screw-in” System,
Thin Type 1.5 mm
20 pieces
11.0 mm
0285 11
20 pieces
0285 13
20 pieces
0285 15
10 pairs
11.0 mm
0284 13
20 pieces
12.5 mm
12.5 mm
0284 15
14.5 mm
0273 09
10 pairs
14.5 mm
PVC Nose Pads, Medium Soft, with Metal Insert
Transparent, Silver, “Push-in” System
0230 12
Transparent, Silver, “Screw-in” System
20 pieces
20 pieces
0255 15
20 pieces
0255 17
20 pieces
12.0 mm
12.0 mm
0230 15
20 pieces
15.0 mm
15.0 mm
0230 17
20 pieces
17.5 mm
17.5 mm
Transparent, Gold, “Push-in” System
0231 12
Transparent, Gold, “Screw-in” System
20 pieces
12.0 mm
0256 12
20 pieces
0256 15
20 pieces
0256 17
20 pieces
12.0 mm
0231 15
20 pieces
15.0 mm
15.0 mm
0231 17
17.5 mm
0255 12
20 pieces
17.5 mm
F
9
Plastic Nose Pads, Hard
Ultra slim, especially transparent and light,
“Push-in” System
0253 07
20 pieces
7.5 mm
20 pieces
12.0 mm
0253 09
20 pieces
20 pieces
0254 09
20 pieces
0254 12
20 pieces
9.0 mm
0253 12
20 pieces
13.0 mm
13.0 mm
Transparent, with Plastic Insert,
“Push-in” System
19.0 mm
0254 22
Especially transparent and light,
“Screw-in” System
9.0 mm
17.5 mm
20 pieces
12.0 mm
Especially transparent and light,
“Push-in” System
14.5 mm
0254 07
7.5 mm
0253 22
F
10
Ultra slim, especially transparent and light,
“Screw-in” System
Transparent, with Plastic Insert,
“Screw-in” System
0223 15
10 pairs
0223 15-50
50 pairs
0223 18
10 pairs
0223 18-50
50 pairs
0223 19
10 pairs
0223 19-50
50 pairs
14.5 mm
17.5 mm
19.0 mm
0224 15
10 pairs
0224 15-50
50 pairs
0224 18
10 pairs
0224 18-50
50 pairs
0224 19
10 pairs
0224 19-50
50 pairs
Comfort Nose Pads
Air Active Pads
Consist of extremely flexible silicone material and offer a high comfort of wearing due to air cushions. Pressure marks can be avoided.
Air Active Pads, Symmetrical,
“Push-in” System
0296 13
Air Active Pads, Symmetrical,
“Screw-in” System
10 pieces
13.0 mm
0297 11
10 pieces
0297 15
10 pieces
0297 17
10 pieces
0297 25
10 pieces
11.0 mm
0296 15
10 pieces
14.5 mm
14.5 mm
0296 17
10 pieces
17.0 mm
17.0 mm
“System 3 AirTec”
14.5 mm
0298 12
with plastic insert
10 pieces
11.9 mm
Biofeel Pads
are made from flexible silicone material and offer a high comfort of wearing due to gel cushions. Pressure marks can be avoided.
Biofeel Pads, “ Push-in” System
0214 01
Biofeel Pads, “Screw-in” System
2 pairs
12.5 mm
2 pairs
0211 10
10 pairs
12.5 mm
0214 10
12.5 mm
0211 01
10 pairs
12.5 mm
F
11
Special Nose Pads
Glass, hypo-allergenic, “Push-in” System
0248 09
10 pieces
9.0 mm
10 pieces
11.0 mm
10 pieces
13.0 mm
10 pieces
15.0 mm
10 pieces
0249 13
10 pieces
0249 15
10 pieces
15.0 mm
Titanium, hypo-allergenic, “Push-in” System
0257 08
4 pieces
0257 08-10
10 pieces
Titanium, hypo-allergenic, “Screw-in” System
8.0 mm
Polished
0203 01
0258 08
4 pieces
0258 08-10
10 pieces
Polished
0204 01
4 pieces
Polished
0203 02
13.0 mm
0249 11
13.0 mm
0248 15
13.0 mm
10 pieces
11.0 mm
0248 13
8.0 mm
0249 09
9.0 mm
0248 11
F
12
Glass, hypo-allergenic, “Screw-in” System
13.0 mm
Matt
Polished
0204 02
4 pieces
13.0 mm
4 pieces
4 pieces
Matt
Silicone with Titanium Screw Holder,
hypo-allergenic, “Screw-in” System
0259 01
4 pieces
13.0 mm
Polymer, “Push-in” System
0268 13
13.0 mm
Polymer, “Screw-in” System
0269 13
10 pieces
13.0 mm
10 pieces
Special Nose Pads and Nose Bridges
Nose Pads for Special Applications
0201 07
7.0 mm
PVC
Silicone
0243 02
20 pieces
To be clipped
0201 13
13.0 mm
Nose Pads for Ray Ban Frames
15.0 mm
With adjustable flaps
0243 03
10 pieces
To be clipped
on vertically
Soft-PVC
10 pieces
15.0 mm
Soft-PVC
10 pieces
With adjustable flaps
e
Silicon
0232 00
16.0 mm
Silicone
0243 12
10 pieces
Support
15.0 mm
Silicone
10 pieces
With adjustable flaps
e
Silicon
0279 51
13.0 mm
System 3
cuneiform
15.0 mm
Silicone
Silicone
10 pieces
With adjustable flaps
F
13
0277 01
19.0 mm
0243 13
10 pairs
3 pairs
To be clipped
on vertically
Spare Parts Kit for Ray Ban Frames
Contains matching PVC nose pads, temples, nose pad arms, hinge and
eyewire screws for many Ray Ban frames.
0243 50
17.5 x 2.5 x 10.5 cm
Silicone Nose Bridges, small
0241 01
Silicone Nose Bridges, large
0242 01
3 pieces
Gold, for metal frames
Gold, for metal frames
14.9 mm
16.9 mm
0241 02
0242 02
3 pieces
Gold, for plastic frames
3 pieces
Gold, for plastic frames
14.9 mm
16.9 mm
0241 10
0242 10
3 pieces
Silver, for metal frames
14.9 mm
3 pieces
Silver, for metal frames
16.9 mm
3 pieces
Tips & Tricks
Nose Pad Arms
for Plastic Frames
Improve Comfort!
Nose Pad Arms, Beta-titanium
Order No. 0304 01, 02, 03, 04, 11
No. 0305 01, 03, 11
Plastic Pad
No. 0253 12
Mounting Tool
No. 0304 00
Spiral Drill, HSS 1.5 mm
No. 2032 15
F
14
or:
Mounting Set
No. 0304 50
Tool Holder
No. 2068 00
Steel Miller
No. 2240 41
Universal Pen
No. 2623 01
15 minutes
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
This is how it works
Cutting
Polishing
Marking
1
2
3
Cut down the nose rest with the miller
2240 41.
Drilling
Optional: polish the surface.
Clamping
Mark the position of the holes.
Pushing
F
15
4
Fix a 1.5 mm drill with the handle 2068 00.
Let the tip be max. 2.7 mm long. Drill the
holes.
5
Clamp the pad arm with the mounting tool.
Inserting the nose pads
Done
7
8
Insert the nose pads.
Done.
6
Push the pad arm into the hole.
Tips & Tricks
Nose Pad Arms for PlasticFrames – page F 14 and F 15
Nose Pad Arms for Plastic Frames
• Allows for anatomical fitting
• Improves comfort
• Available in titanium and plastic
F
16
Mounting Set Nose Pad Arms Beta Titanium
Mounting Set Nose Pad Arms Plastic
• Contents: Tool for nose pad arms, 8 different nose pad arms (2 pairs
per colour or size), required drill (No. 2032 15), matching
nose pads (No. 0227 10 and 0228 10) and nose pad
screws (No. 0896 00)
• In practical box
• Contents: Tool for nose pad arms, 7 different nose pad arms
(4 pairs per colour or size), required drill (No. 2032 15)
and matching nose pads (No. 0254 12)
• In practical box
0304 50
0303 51
105 x 23.5 x 178 mm
105 x 23.5 x 178 mm
Beta Titanium
•
•
•
•
Fixation through one point system
One drill hole is sufficient
Implementation by pushing in
Matching drill: No. 2032 15
0304 01
Silver
“Push-in” System
0304 . .
0305 01
Silver
2 pairs
Mounting Tool for Beta Titanium Nose Pad Arms
• For easy fitting of titanium nose pad arms
• Comfortable handling
• Enables work with pinpoint accuracy
0304 00
0304 03
Brown
2 pairs
“Screw-in” System
0305 . .
0304 02
Pink
0305 03
Brown
0304 04
Blue
0304 11
Silver
Size XL
0305 11
Silver
Size XL
Nose Pad Arms for Plastic Frames
Plastic
0303 . .
0303 01
Black
4 pairs
0303 02
Smoked brown
0303 03
Light blue
0303 04
Transparent
0303 05
Red
0303 06
Navy
0303 07
Smoked grey
Mounting Tool for Plastic Nose Pad Arms
• For easy fitting of plastic nose pad arms
• Comfortable handling
• Enables work with pinpoint accuracy
F
17
0303 00
Nose Pad Arms for Metal Frames
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour: Silver
0288 01
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour: Gold
10 pieces
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour: Silver
0287 01
10 pieces
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour: Gold
5 pairs
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour: Silver
0289 01
0288 02
10 pieces
0287 02
5 pairs
Special Nose Pad Arms
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour/Material: Titanium
Type/Use:
“System 3” and “System 3 Dash M”
Colour: Silver
0288 03
0276 01
10 pieces
10 pieces
The suitable nose pads are shown on page F 7, No. 0276 11,
0277 11, 0279 11, 0279 21, 0279 31 and 0279 41.
Type/Use:
Universal application
Colour/Material: Titanium
0287 03
F
18
5 pairs
Type/Use:
Nose pads with adjustable flap
Colour: Silver
Type/Use:
Nose pads with adjustable flap
Colour: Gold
0299 01
0299 02
5 pairs
5 pairs
The suitable nose pads are shown on page F 13, No. 0243 02 and 0243 03.
Nose Pad Cushions
PAINEX Assortment of Sponge Cushions
To reduce the bridge width.
Self-adhesive, white.
1 strip = 4 pairs
Contents: 9 strips à 1.0 mm thickness
12 strips à 1.5 mm thickness
9 strips à 2.0 mm thickness
0739 00
Improves the comfort
in wearing plastic frames
PAINEX Sponge Cushions
Single thickness.
1 strip = 4 pairs
Contents: 12 strips
0739 10
1.0 mm
0739 15
1.5 mm
0739 20
2.0 mm
Nose Pad Components
Asymmetric nose pad component adhering to plastic frames.
Can be used with e.g. Acetone No. 3173 00.
Contents: 6 pairs
0.8 > 2.0 mm
0263 00
19 x 8 mm
0.8 > 2.0 mm
Nose Pad Cushions
Nose Pad Cushion
Self-adhesive silicone foil.
Contents: 20 pieces
Almost
invisible
0748 13
13 mm
0.7 mm
0748 15
15 mm
0.7 mm
0748 17
17 mm
0.7 mm
0748 19
19 mm
0.7 mm
0748 23
13 mm
1.0 mm
0748 25
15 mm
1.0 mm
0748 27
17 mm
1.0 mm
0748 29
19 mm
1.0 mm
Nose Pad Cushion Assortment
Contents: 20 pieces each No. 0748 13; 0748 15; 0748 17
and 0748 19
0748 50
F
19
80 pieces
Nose Pad Cushion Assortment
Contents: 20 pieces each No. 0748 23; 0748 25; 0748 27
and 0748 29
0748 51
80 pieces
Due to deposits (cosmetics/skin oil) we recommend replacing
after approx. 3 to 4 weeks.
Nose Pad Cushion
Self-adhesive silicone foil.
Width: 7 mm each
Contents: 10 pairs
0758 01
Size S
19 mm
2.0 mm
0758 02
Size M
19 mm
2.4 mm
0758 03
Size L
19 mm
2.7 mm
Nose Pad Cushion Assortment
Contents: 10 pairs each No. 0758 01; 0758 02 and 0758 03
0758 50
30 pairs
The B&S Screw Range:
Extensive selection.
For all applications.
Easy to find simple to order.
F
20
OPTION
A
Ascending
thread size
OPTION
F 22–F 30
B
Screws for
special applications
F 31–F 39
1. Select your special screw (F 21 Option B)
2. Select the size
3. Select the colour
1. Select the thread size (F 21 Option A)
2. Select the screws type
3. Select the colour
Icons makes your selection easy
Screws for:
Shapes:
Measurements:
Nose pads
Slotted screw
Screw securer
Rim joints
Phillips screw
Thread size
Hinges
Phillips/slotted
combination
Head diameter
Rimless frames
Star screw/nut
Total length
Hexagon screw/nut
Diameter
Inner diameter
Outer diameter
OPTION
OPTION
A
B
Thread Size – assorted
0.8–1.1 mm
F 22
1.2 mm
F 23–F 24
1.3 mm
F 24
1.4 mm
F 25–F 28
1.5 mm
F 28–F 29
1.6 mm
F 29–F 30
1.7 mm
F 30
Special Screws
4-in-1 Screws
F 31–F 33
Rimless Frames Screws
F 34
Screws for Plastic Hinges
F 35
Spring Hinge Screws
F 36
Spring Hinge Screws with blue Screw Securer
F 37
Screws with transparent Nylon Securer
F 38
Screws with blue Tuflock Securer
F 38
Screws with black Screw Securer
F 39
Temple Screws
F 39
And much more
Lens Testing Screws
F 30
Assortments
F 40– F 43
Nuts
F 44– F 45
Washers
F 46– F 47
Sleeves
F 48– F 49
F
21
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 0.8 mm
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
German
Silver
Silver
Order
No.
3.70
1.30
0805 10
Suitable
for nut
100 pieces
–
Thread Size 1.0 mm
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
F
22
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
3.80
1.80
0865 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
3.80
1.80
0865 10
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
4.00
1.20
0815 00
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
4.00
1.40
0896 00
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Gold
4.00
1.40
0896 10
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Gun
4.00
1.40
0896 20
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
4.00
1.40
0896 00TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.45
1.40
0807 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 05
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 05TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 15
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 15TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
12.80/
2.80/
1.40
0816 000
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
12.80/
2.80/
1.40
0816 100
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
12.80/
2.80/
1.40
0816 200
50 pieces
–
Thread Size 1.1 mm
200%
Screw securer
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
German
Silver
Silver
Order
No.
4.20
1.30
0803 00
Suitable
for nut
100 pieces
–
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.2 mm
200%
Screw securer
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.30
1.80
0801 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
2.60
1.60
0860 40
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.20
1.60
0853 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.40
1.60
0882 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
3.40
1.60
0882 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.00
1.40
0896 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.70
1.60
0871 00
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
4.80
1.60
0818 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 03
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 03TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 13
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 13TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 23
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 23TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
10.70
2.50
0857 00
100 pieces
0822 01TL
Steel
Gold
10.70
2.50
0857 10
100 pieces
0822 02TL
German
Silver
Silver
12.00
1.80
0831 00
100 pieces
0822 01TL
Brass
Gold
12.00
1.80
0831 10
100 pieces
0822 02TL
Brass
Gun
12.00
1.80
0831 20
100 pieces
0822 03
German
Silver
Silver
12.00
2.50
0841 01
100 pieces
0822 01TL
German
Silver
Gold
12.00
2.50
0841 11
100 pieces
0822 02TL
Steel
Silver
12.60
2.50
0858 00
100 pieces
0831 02
Steel
Gold
12.60
2.50
0858 10
100 pieces
0831 12
Steel
Silver
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 001
50 pieces
–
F
23
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.2 mm
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Gold
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 101
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 201
50 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
15.00
1.80
0843 00
100 pieces
0822 01TL
Steel
Silver
15.50/
5.50/
1.80
0816 012
50 pieces
–
Thread Size 1.3 mm
200%
F
24
Screw securer
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
3.50
1.70
0880 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
3.50
1.70
0880 10
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
5.30
1.70
0804 00
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Gun
5.30
1.70
0804 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 06
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 06TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 16
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 16TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
7.00
1.80
0861 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
7.00
1.80
0861 10
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
8.00
2.80
0848 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
11.50
1.80
0861 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
11.50
1.80
0861 11
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 002
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 102
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 202
50 pieces
–
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.4 mm
200%
Screw securer
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
2.50
2.20
0878 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
2.70
2.00
0870 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
2.80
1.80
0851 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.00
2.00
0811 00
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.10
2.00
0874 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.30
2.00
0869 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.40
1.80
0851 02
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.45
2.00
0854 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.50
2.00
0811 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.70
2.00
0869 02
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.90
2.00
0869 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
3.90
1.80
0872 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
3.90
1.80
0872 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
3.90
1.80
0872 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.00
1.80
0851 03
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.00
2.00
0876 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.00
2.00
0811 02
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.10
1.80
0860 55
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
4.20
1.80
0814 00
200 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.20
2.00
0869 03
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.30
1.80
0851 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.30
2.00
0867 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
4.30
2.00
0868 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
4.40
1.80
0873 00
100 pieces
–
F
25
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.4 mm
200%
F
26
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Steel
Silver
4.50
2.00
0811 03
50 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
4.80
2.50
0821 00
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
5.00
1.80
0820 00
200 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.20
1.80
0860 20
100 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
5.40
1.80
0852 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.00
1.80
0860 58
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.00
1.80
0860 58TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50
1.80
0860 30
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50
1.80
0860 30TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50
2.00
0813 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 00TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 01TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
7.80/
4.80/
2.00
0819 02
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 10TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 11
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 11TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
7.80/
4.80/
2.00
0819 12
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 20TL
50 pieces
–
7.80
2.00
0855 00
50 pieces
–
8.60
2.80
0828 10
100 pieces
–
Silver
Steel
for plastic hinges
German
Silver
Screw securer
Silver
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.4 mm
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Steel
Silver
10.60/
3.60/
1.80
0817 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
10.60/
3.60/
1.80
0817 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
10.60/
3.60/
1.80
0817 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
10.60
2.80
0835 00
100 pieces
0824 01TL
Steel
Gold
10.60
2.80
0835 10
100 pieces
0824 02TL
10.80
2.00
0855 01
50 pieces
–
Silver
Steel
for plastic hinges
Screw securer
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
German
Silver
Silver
11.40
2.80
0824 11
100 pieces
0824 01TL
German
Silver
Gold
11.40
2.80
0824 14
100 pieces
0824 02TL
Steel
Silver
11.50
1.80
0862 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
11.50
1.80
0862 11
50 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
12.00
2.50
0841 00
100 pieces
0824 01TL
Brass
Gold
12.00
2.50
0841 10
100 pieces
0824 02TL
German
Silver
Gun
12.00
2.50
0841 20
100 pieces
0824 03
Steel
Silver
12.60
2.50
0857 01
100 pieces
0824 01TL
Steel
Gold
12.60
2.50
0857 11
100 pieces
0824 02TL
Steel
Silver
12.60
2.50
0858 01
100 pieces
0831 04
Steel
Gold
12.60
2.50
0858 11
100 pieces
0831 14
Steel
Silver
13.00/
3.00/
1.80
0816 003
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
13.00/
3.00/
1.80
0816 103
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
13.00/
3.00/
1.80
0816 203
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 004
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 104
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 204
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
13.50/
3.50/
2.00
0816 007
50 pieces
–
F
27
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.4 mm
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
F
28
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Gold
13.50/
3.50/
2.00
0816 107
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
13.50/
3.50/
2.00
0816 207
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 008
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 108
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 208
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 009
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 109
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 209
50 pieces
–
German
Silver
Silver
15.00
1.80
0843 01
100 pieces
0824 01TL
German
Silver
Gold
15.00
1.80
0843 11
100 pieces
0824 02TL
Steel
Silver
15.50/
5.50/
2.00
0816 013
50 pieces
–
Thread Size 1.5 mm
200%
Screw securer
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
German
Silver
Silver
5.00
1.80
0845 15
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.20
1.80
0842 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.20
1.80
0842 00TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
5.20
1.80
0842 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
5.20
1.80
0842 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 07
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 07TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 17
100 pieces
–
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.5 mm
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Steel
Gold
German
Silver
Silver
Steel
Order
No.
6.50/
3.50/
Suitable
for nut
2.00
0819 17TL
50 pieces
–
10.00
2.80
0827 00
100 pieces
–
Silver
11.50
1.80
0863 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
11.50
1.80
0863 11
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.00/
4.00/
1.80
0816 005
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.00/
4.00/
1.80
0816 105
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.00/
4.00/
1.80
0816 205
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 006
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 106
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 206
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 010
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 110
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 210
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 011
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 111
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 211
50 pieces
–
Thread Size 1.6 mm
200%
Screw securer
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
3.50
2.50
0811 04
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.20
1.80
0842 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
5.20
1.80
0842 01TL
50 pieces
–
F
29
Screws ascending Thread Size
Thread Size 1.6 mm
200%
Screw
style
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Steel
Gold
5.20
1.80
0842 11
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
5.20
1.80
0842 21
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 04
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 04TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 14
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 14TL
50 pieces
–
7.80
2.00
0855 02
50 pieces
–
Silver
9.00
2.80
0837 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
for plastic hinges
10.80
2.00
0855 03
50 pieces
–
Silver
Steel
for plastic hinges
German
Silver
F
30
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Thread Size 1.7 mm
200%
Screw
style
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
German
Silver
Silver
Order
No.
7.30
2.80
0834 00
Suitable
for nut
100 pieces
–
Lens Testing Screws for Metal Frames
100 %
Screw securer
Order
No.
Material
Colour
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
40.00
0881 12
1 piece
German
Silver
Silver
1.30
40.00
0881 13
1 piece
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
40.00
0881 14
1 piece
Used at the rim joint
to check the size of the lens
Special Screws
Complete 4 jobs in 1!
With the 4-in-1 screw fastening of sunken rim joints and spring hinges will be easier than ever before. The long conical shaped pin makes
threading easier and can then be snapped off . Thanks to the self-cutting thread and screw securer no further action is needed.
Blue screw fastener
offers a firm grip
Easy to shorten
by snapping
Self tapping thread
Easy mounting due to a conical,
long tip for difficult to reach hinges
4-in-1 Screws
Rim Joint
F
31
Hinge
Special Screws
4-in-1 Screws
200%
F
32
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.00
12.80/
2.80/
1.40
0816 000
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.00
12.80/
2.80/
1.40
0816 100
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.00
12.80/
2.80/
1.40
0816 200
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.20
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 001
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.20
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 101
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.20
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 201
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.20
15.50/
5.50/
1.80
0816 012
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.30
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 002
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.30
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 102
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.30
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 202
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
13.00/
3.00/
1.80
0816 003
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
13.00/
3.00/
1.80
0816 103
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
13.00/
3.00/
1.80
0816 203
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 004
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 104
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 204
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
13.50/
3.50/
2.00
0816 007
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
13.50/
3.50/
2.00
0816 107
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
13.50/
3.50/
2.00
0816 207
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 008
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 108
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 208
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 009
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 109
50 pieces
–
Special Screws
4-in-1 Screws
200%
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Gun
1.40
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 209
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
15.50/
5.50/
2.00
0816 013
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
14.00/
4.00/
1.80
0816 005
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
14.00/
4.00/
1.80
0816 105
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.50
14.00/
4.00/
1.80
0816 205
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 006
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 106
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.50
14.80/
4.80/
1.80
0816 206
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 010
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 110
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.50
14.00/
4.00/
2.00
0816 210
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 011
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 111
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.50
14.80/
4.80/
2.00
0816 211
50 pieces
–
4-in-1 Screw Assortment
Contents: 7 different 4-in-1 screws (350 pieces)
0816 050
43 g
F
33
Special Screws
You will find the following parts on
Page
F 34
Page
F 49
Page
F 46
Page
F 44
Page
F 45
Page
F 47
Rimless Frame Screws
200%
F
34
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.20
10.70
2.50
0857 00
100 pieces
0822 01TL
Steel
Gold
1.20
10.70
2.50
0857 10
100 pieces
0822 02TL
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
12.00
1.80
0831 00
100 pieces
0822 01TL
Brass
Gold
1.20
12.00
1.80
0831 10
100 pieces
0822 02TL
Brass
Gun
1.20
12.00
1.80
0831 20
100 pieces
0822 03
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
12.00
2.50
0841 01
100 pieces
0822 01TL
German
Silver
Gold
1.20
12.00
2.50
0841 11
100 pieces
0822 02TL
Steel
Silver
1.20
12.60
2.50
0858 00
100 pieces
0831 02
Steel
Gold
1.20
12.60
2.50
0858 10
100 pieces
0831 12
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
15.00
1.80
0843 00
100 pieces
0822 01TL
Steel
Silver
1.40
10.60
2.80
0835 00
100 pieces
0824 01TL
Steel
Gold
1.40
10.60
2.80
0835 10
100 pieces
0824 02TL
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
12.00
2.50
0841 00
100 pieces
0824 01TL
Brass
Gold
1.40
12.00
2.50
0841 10
100 pieces
0824 02TL
German
Silver
Gun
1.40
12.00
2.50
0841 20
100 pieces
0824 03
Steel
Silver
1.40
12.60
2.50
0857 01
100 pieces
0824 01TL
Steel
Gold
1.40
12.60
2.50
0857 11
100 pieces
0824 02TL
Steel
Silver
1.40
12.60
2.50
0858 01
100 pieces
0831 04
Steel
Gold
1.40
12.60
2.50
0858 11
100 pieces
0831 14
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
15.00
1.80
0843 01
100 pieces
0824 01TL
German
Silver
Gold
1.40
15.00
1.80
0843 11
100 pieces
0824 02TL
Special Screws
F
35
Made of steel, available
in silver colour
Screws for
Plastic Hinges
Coarse thread especially for plastic
200%
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.40
7.80
2.00
0855 00
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
10.80
2.00
0855 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.60
7.80
2.00
0855 02
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.60
10.80
2.00
0855 03
50 pieces
–
Special Screws
Made of steel, available
colours: silver, gold
and gun
Simple to mount due
to a conical tip
Spring Hinge Screws
Easy to shorten
by snapping
200%
F
36
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.00
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 05
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.00
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 15
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.20
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 03
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.20
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 13
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.20
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 23
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.30
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 06
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.30
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 16
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
7.80/
4.80/
2.00
0819 02
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 11
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
7.80/
4.80/
2.00
0819 12
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
10.60/
3.60/
1.80
0817 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
10.60/
3.60/
1.80
0817 10
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
10.60/
3.60/
1.80
0817 20
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 07
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 17
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.60
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 04
100 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.60
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 14
100 pieces
–
Special Screws
Made of steel, available
colours: silver, gold
and gun
Simple to mount due
to a conical tip
Blue screw securer
offers a firm grip
Easy to shorten
by snapping
Spring Hinge Screws
with blue Screw Securer
200%
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.00
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 05TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.00
5.80/
2.80/
1.40
0819 15TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.20
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 03TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.20
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 13TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.20
5.90/
3.50/
2.00
0819 23TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.30
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 06TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.30
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 16TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 00TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 01TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 10TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
7.00/
4.00/
2.00
0819 11TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gun
1.40
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 20TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 07TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 17TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.60
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 04TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.60
6.50/
3.50/
2.00
0819 14TL
50 pieces
–
F
37
Special Screws
Made of steel,
available colours:
silver and gold
Screws with
transparent
Nylon Securer
Transparent
nylon inlay
Self tapping thread
200%
100 %
Head
style
F
38
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.30
11.50
1.80
0861 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.30
11.50
1.80
0861 11
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
11.50
1.80
0862 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.40
11.50
1.80
0862 11
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
11.50
1.80
0863 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Gold
1.50
11.50
1.80
0863 11
50 pieces
–
F
38
Available in silver
Screws with blue
Tuflock Securer
Reusable due to Tuflock coating on thread of screw
200%
100 %
Screw
style
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
German
Silver
Silver
1.00
4.00
1.40
0896 00TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
6.00
1.80
0860 58TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
6.50
1.80
0860 30TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.50
5.20
1.80
0842 00TL
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.60
5.20
1.80
0842 01TL
50 pieces
–
Special Screws
The black securing ring wedges
to give a firm grip
Screws with
black Screw Securer
Phillips/ slotted combination for
a free screwdriver selection
200%
100 %
Head
style
Material: steel
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.40
2.80
1.80
0851 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
3.30
2.00
0869 01
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
3.40
1.80
0851 02
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
3.70
2.00
0869 02
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
3.90
2.00
0869 00
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
4.00
1.80
0851 03
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
4.20
2.00
0869 03
100 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
4.30
1.80
0851 00
100 pieces
–
Made of steel,
available in silver
Temple Screws
The black nylon sleeve ensures a smooth
movement of the temple
200%
100 %
Head
style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Suitable
for nut
Steel
Silver
1.40
3.00
2.00
0811 00
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
3.50
2.00
0811 01
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
4.00
2.00
0811 02
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.40
4.50
2.00
0811 03
50 pieces
–
Steel
Silver
1.60
3.50
2.50
0811 04
50 pieces
–
F
39
Our small parts organiser
boxes can be found
on pages G 6 and G 7.
Screw Assortment
Contents: 28 different screws and nuts (2,800 pieces)
F
40
0890 16
You will receive all assortments with
hinged boxes. We reserve the right
to change the assortment.
Screw Assortment Gun-Coloured
Contents: 13 of the most used screws and nuts,
altogether 1,300 pieces, 2 empty boxes
0890 17
Screw Assortment
In organiser box system No. 1457 20 (see catalogue page G 6).
Contents: 7 of the most used screws and nuts, altogether 700 pieces,
1 empty box
0890 10
Rimless Frames Assortment
Contents: 12 of the most used screws, nuts, washers and sleeves
(1,300 pieces)
0890 18
F
41
Washers Assortment
Contents: 8 of the most used washers (1,000 pieces)
0745 50
Decorative Screws Assortments
Assortment Silver with Hexagon Head
Contents: 10 hex headed decorative 1.2 mm screws for rimless frames
10 transparent plastic sleeves 1.2 mm
10 dome nuts 1.2 mm
0890 03
15 g
Assortment Gold with Hexagon Head
Contents: 10 hex headed decorative 1.2 mm screws for rimless frames
10 transparent plastic sleeves 1.2 mm
10 dome nuts 1.2 mm
0890 04
F
42
15 g
You will receive all assortments with
hinged boxes. We reserve the right
to change the assortment.
Decorative Screws Assortment Silver
Contents: 10 decorative 1.2 mm screws for rimless frames
10 transparent plastic sleeves 1.2 mm
10 dome nuts 1.2 mm
0890 01
15 g
Our small parts organiser
boxes can be found
on pages G 6 and G 7.
Decorative Screws Assortment Gold
Contents: 10 decorative 1.2 mm screws for rimless frames
10 transparent plastic sleeves 1.2 mm
10 dome nuts 1.2 mm
0890 02
15 g
Swarovski Rhinestones Assortment
• Round, flat-backed or conical in three sizes:
S (1.7–1.9 mm), M (2.1–2.3 mm) und L (2.5-2.7 mm)
• Available in a Crystal (clear) or coloured assortment
• Coloured contents: Crystal (clear), rosé, light blue, red and light brown
• For the conical stones we recommend our double cone miller
No. 2265 . . on page C 36
55 x 7 x 45 mm
0900 50
Crystal (clear)
0900 51
Coloured
150 pieces
Rhinestone Picker
The perfect tool for a precise placement of small parts, such as
rhinestones, washers, screws, etc.
Clean the tip with water to renew the adhesion.
0900 61
F
43
Nuts
200%
F
44
Screw securer
100 %
Style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Matching
nut driver
German
Silver
Silver
1.10
2.40
0866 00
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gold
1.10
2.40
0866 10
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gun
1.10
2.40
0866 20
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
2.50
0822 01
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
2.50
0822 01TL
100 pieces
1746 00
Brass
Gold
1.20
2.50
0822 02
100 pieces
1746 00
Brass
Gold
1.20
2.50
0822 02TL
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gun
1.20
2.50
0822 03
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.30
2.50
0823 01
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gold
1.30
2.50
0823 02
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gun
1.30
2.50
0823 03
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
2.50
0824 01
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
2.50
0824 01TL
100 pieces
1746 00
Brass
Gold
1.40
2.50
0824 02
100 pieces
1746 00
Brass
Gold
1.40
2.50
0824 02TL
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gun
1.40
2.50
0824 03
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.50
2.50
0830 01
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Gold
1.50
2.50
0830 02
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.60
2.60
0833 01
100 pieces
1767 00
German
Silver
Gold
1.60
2.60
0833 02
100 pieces
1767 00
Dome Nuts
200%
100 %
Style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Matching
nut driver
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
2.20
0839 00
100 pieces
1749 00
Brass
Gold
1.20
2.20
0839 10
100 pieces
1749 00
German
Silver
Gun
1.20
2.20
0839 20
100 pieces
1749 00
Steel
Silver
1.20
2.40
0832 00
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Gold
1.20
2.40
0832 10
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Silver
1.20
2.40
0849 00
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Gold
1.20
2.40
0849 10
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Gun
1.20
2.40
0849 20
100 pieces
1767 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
2.20
0840 00
100 pieces
1749 00
Brass
Gold
1.40
2.20
0840 10
100 pieces
1749 00
German
Silver
Gun
1.40
2.20
0840 20
100 pieces
1749 00
Steel
Silver
1.40
2.40
0838 00
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Gold
1.40
2.40
0838 10
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Silver
1.40
2.40
0850 00
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Gold
1.40
2.40
0850 10
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Gun
1.40
2.40
0850 20
100 pieces
1767 00
Steel
Silver
1.50
2.40
0829 00
100 pieces
1746 00
Steel
Gold
1.50
2.40
0829 10
100 pieces
1746 00
F
45
Special Washers for Titanium Temples
200%
100 %
Schematic
side view
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Steel
Silver
1.20
2.80
0745 07
100 pieces
Steel
Silver
1.40
2.80
0745 08
100 pieces
The washer prevents direct contact between the hinge and the temple rolls. Follow the 3 illustrated
steps to assemble. First place the washers at the temple roll, then attach the temple to the hinge and
then fasten the screw. The temples can then move freely and without friction.
Washers for Rimless Frames
F
46
200%
100 %
Material
Colour
Order
No.
German Silver
for screws with conical heads
Silver
1.20
2.80
0745 10
100 pieces
Brass
for screws with conical heads
Gold
1.20
2.80
0745 11
100 pieces
German Silver
Silver
1.20
2.50
0745 20
100 pieces
German Silver
Gold
1.20
2.50
0745 14
100 pieces
German Silver
Gun
1.20
2.50
0745 30
100 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
1.30
2.60
0745 00
150 pieces
German Silver
Silver
1.30
2.50
0745 21
100 pieces
German Silver
Gold
1.30
2.50
0745 15
100 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
1.40
2.80
0745 02
150 pieces
German Silver
Silver
1.40
2.50
0745 22
100 pieces
German Silver
Gold
1.40
2.50
0745 16
100 pieces
German Silver
Gun
1.40
2.80
0745 32
100 pieces
German Silver
for screws with conical heads
Silver
1.40
2.80
0745 09
100 pieces
Brass
for screws with conical heads
Gold
1.40
2.80
0745 12
100 pieces
German Silver
Silver
1.50
2.50
0745 23
100 pieces
German Silver
Gold
1.50
2.50
0745 17
100 pieces
Washers for Rimless Frames
200%
100 %
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Plastic
Transparent
1.60
3.00
0745 13
150 pieces
German Silver
for reach nuts No. 0844 00
Silver
1.65
2.70
0745 24
100 pieces
German Silver
for reach nuts No. 0844 10
Gold
1.65
2.70
0745 18
100 pieces
German Silver
for reach nuts No. 0845 00
Silver
1.85
2.90
0745 25
100 pieces
German Silver
for reach nuts No. 0845 10
Gold
1.85
2.90
0745 19
100 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
2.00
3.50
0745 33
150 pieces
Please take note of our washer assortment on page F 41.
F
47
Wedge-shaped Washers
200%
Schematic
side view
100 %
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Plastic
Transparent
1.20
2.80
0745 26
150 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
1.40
2.80
0745 27
150 pieces
Reach Nuts
200%
100 %
Style
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Matching
nut driver
German
Silver
Silver
1.20
4.00
2.50
0844 00
100 pieces
1746 00
Brass
Gold
1.20
4.00
2.50
0844 10
100 pieces
1746 00
German
Silver
Silver
1.40
4.00
2.50
0845 00
100 pieces
1746 00
Brass
Gold
1.40
4.00
2.50
0845 10
100 pieces
1746 00
Please note the suitable washers on the top of this page.
Caps for Rimless Frame Screws
200%
100 %
Material
Colour
Order
No.
Plastic
Transparent
1.20
2.50
3.50
0771 22
100 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
1.40
2.50
3.50
0771 23
100 pieces
Premium Sleeves from frey & winkler
• Produced using the latest technology
• Maximum durability
• High quality basic materials
• Product certified according to ISO 9001
• High dimensional accuracy
• Colour stability
• No flashes
Sleeves for Rimless Frames
200%
F
48
100 %
Material
Colour
Material
quality
Order
No.
Plastic
Transparent
Medium soft
0.80
1.30
0771 27
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium soft
short version
0.80
1.40
0771 01
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium hard
short version
0.80
1.40
0771 02
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Soft
short version
0.80
1.40
0771 03
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium soft
0.80
1.40
0771 04
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Soft
0.80
1.40
0771 05
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium hard
0.80
1.40
0771 06
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Soft
open version
0.80
1.40
0771 10
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium hard
open version
0.80
1.40
0771 11
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium soft
open version
0.80
1.40
0771 12
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium soft
0.80
1.50
0771 28
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Soft
1.00
1.80
0771 07
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium hard
1.00
1.80
0771 08
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Medium soft
1.00
1.80
0771 09
50 pieces
Plastic
Black
Soft
for tinted
glasses
0.80
1.40
0771 19
50 pieces
Sleeves and Shrinking Tube for Rimless Frames
200%
100 %
Schematic
side view
Material
Colour
Material
quality
Order
No.
Plastic
Transparent
1.20
2.80
0771 13
100 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
1.40
2.80
0771 14
100 pieces
Plastic
Opaque
1.50
3.40
0771 18
100 pieces
Plastic
Opaque
1.60
3.50
0771 00
100 pieces
Plastic
Opaque
1.20
2.00
0759 00
3m
Plastic
Transparent
Shrinking tube for rimless frames
1.75 mm = shrinks when
heated to 0.8 mm
0759 10
10 à
50 mm
Plastic
Transparent
Hard
1.00
1.80
0771 21
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Hard
0.80
1.50
0771 24
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Hard
0.80
1.40
0771 25
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Hard
0.80
1.50
0771 26
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Soft
0.80
1.60
0771 30
50 pieces
Plastic
Transparent
Hard
1.00
1.80
0771 29
50 pieces
Sleeves Assortment
Contents: 7 different sleeves for rimless frames (350 pieces)
0771 50
28 g
F
49
Hinges
Explanation on hinges:
Hinge width
Hole distance
Dimensions
(width x depth or
width x height x depth)
Milling between
rolls and
thickness of rolls
Thread size
Total length
Hinge length
200% Picture enlarged
(200 %)
Head diameter
Hinge roll radius
100 % Picture actual size
(100 %)
Pin diameter
Packing unit:
piece or pair
• All dimensions in mm
• Changes of sizes reserved
All double rolled hinges will be delivered with matching screws.
F
50
Solder Hinges
Middle part
left
Temple part
Order
No.
right
2.5
0.75–0.75
5.0
1.8
1.4
0400 01
10 pieces
2.5
0.75–0.75
5.0
1.8
1.4
0400 02
10 pieces
2.5
1.0
5.0
1.8
1.4
0400 10
10 pieces
3.0
0.9–0.9
5.0
1.8
1.4
0401 01
10 pieces
3.0
0.9–0.9
5.0
1.8
1.4
0401 02
10 pieces
3.0
1.2
5.0
1.8
1.4
0401 10
10 pieces
3.0
0.9–0.9
5.0
1.6
1.4
0402 01
10 pieces
3.0
0.9–0.9
5.0
1.6
1.4
0402 02
10 pieces
3.5
1.0–1.0
3.95
1.6
1.4
0403 01
10 pieces
3.5
1.0–1.0
3.95
1.6
1.4
0403 02
10 pieces
3.5
1.05–1.05
5.0
1.8
1.4
0404 01
10 pieces
3.5
1.05–1.05
5.0
1.8
1.4
0404 02
10 pieces
3.5
1.4
5.0
1.8
1.4
0404 10
10 pieces
Hinges
Spring Hinge Sets
Middle part
left
Order
No.
Temple part
right
3.0
0.8–0.8
1.2
3.0
0.8–0.8
1.2
3.0
1.3
–
3.3
0.9–0.9
1.2
3.3
0.9–0.9
1.2
3.0
1.3
–
0441 10
5 pairs
0442 10
5 pairs
F
51
Hidden Hinges
Middle part
straight
Middle part
left
Order
No.
right
5.0
1.0
1.4
0409 00
10 pieces
5.0
1.2
1.4
0412 00
10 pieces
5.0
1.4
1.4
0414 00
10 pieces
4.4
1.3
1.4
0416 00
10 pieces
3.5
1.4
1.4
0417 00
10 pieces
3.5
1.6
1.4
0418 00
10 pieces
7.0
1.6
1.4
0422 00
10 pieces
2.8
0.8–0.8
1.4
0423 01
10 pieces
2.8
0.8–0.8
1.4
0423 02
10 pieces
3.3
0.9–0.9
1.4
0424 01
10 pieces
3.3
0.9–0.9
1.4
0424 02
10 pieces
4.5
1.0–1.0
1.4
0425 01
10 pieces
4.5
1.0–1.0
1.4
0425 02
10 pieces
Hinges
Rivet Hinges
Middle part
left
F
52
Temple part
right
left
Order
No.
right
3.0
1.0
2.5
1.4
0405 01
10 pieces
3.0
1.0
2.5
1.4
0405 02
10 pieces
3.0
0.8–0.8
2.5
1.4
0405 11
10 pieces
3.0
0.8–0.8
2.5
1.4
0405 12
10 pieces
3.0
1.2
2.5
1.4
0406 00
10 pieces
3.0
0.9–0.9
2.5
1.4
0406 11
10 pieces
3.0
0.9–0.9
2.5
1.4
0406 12
10 pieces
3.5
1.4
2.5
1.4
0407 01
10 pieces
3.5
1.4
2.5
1.4
0407 02
10 pieces
3.5
0.9–0.9
2.5
1.4
0407 11
10 pieces
3.5
0.9–0.9
2.5
1.4
0407 12
10 pieces
6.0
0.8–0.8
2.5
1.4
0408 01
10 pieces
6.0
0.8–0.8
2.5
1.4
0408 02
10 pieces
6.0
0.8–0.8
2.5
1.4
0408 03
10 pieces
6.0
0.8–0.8
2.5
1.4
0408 04
10 pieces
6.0
1.1–0.7–1.1
2.5
1.4
0408 11
10 pieces
6.0
1.1–0.7–1.1
2.5
1.4
0408 12
10 pieces
5.5
0.8
–
1.4
0483 00
10 pieces
6.0
1.0–0.8–1.0
2.5
1.4
0483 11
10 pieces
6.0
1.0–0.8–1.0
2.5
1.4
0483 12
10 pieces
Titanium Hinge Set
Contents: 5 right and 5 left completely assembled hinges
Material: Hinges = titanium, screws = stainless steel, washers = German silver
0415 00
3.7 mm
1.8 mm
0.7 mm
1.4 mm
4.6 mm
10 pieces
Rim Joints
200%
100 %
Material
Colour
German
Silver
Silver
German
Silver
Silver
Application
Order
No.
Flat, for eyewire 1.80 to 2.50 mm.
Has to be cut after soldering,
with screws.
Flat, for eyewire 1.80 to 2.30 mm.
Has to be cut after soldering,
with screws.
1.40
2.60 x
2.80 x
3.40
0898 01
10 pieces
1.40
2.40 x
4.50
0898 02
10 pieces
F
53
Rivets
200%
100 %
Material
Colour
Order
No.
German
Silver
Silver
25.00
1.70
0.70:
1.70
0906 00
200 pieces
German
Silver
Silver
10.00
1.80
1.20
0904 03
100 pieces
The B & S Temples and Temple Ends Range:
Extensive selection.
For all applications.
Easy to find simple to order.
F
54
Ordering in 3 Steps
1. Select form and material
2. Select the length
3. Select colour and diameter
&
•
•
•
•
The Icons guarantees:
High-quality basic materials
Maximum durability
Colour stability
Highest precision
•
•
•
•
Made in Germany Temple Ends offers you:
Small cast points for better wear comfort
Rounded edges
High dimensional accuracy and high quality of the composite materials
Certified according to ISO 9001
Worth Knowing
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 54
06.02.14 14:21
Overview for Simple Selection
Standard Temple End
•
•
•
•
•
Length: 64 mm
Length: 65 mm
Length: 67 mm
Length: 70 mm
Length: 75 mm – To extend Temples
F 56
F 56–F 58
F 59
F 59
F 59
Silicone Temple End
• Length: 60 mm
• Length: 65 mm
• Length: 70 mm
F 60
F 60
F 60
Temple End with Square Opening
• Length: 63 mm – For Straight Temples
• Length: 63 mm – Flat, Square Opening
• Length: 70 mm – Flat Opening
F 61
F 61
F 61
F
55
Sports Temple Ends
•
•
•
•
Sports Temple Ends made of Silicone
Sports Temple End
MEGALOCK Temple End
Non-slip Temple End
F 64– F 66
F 67
F 67
F 67
Shrinking Tubes
• Shrinking Tubes
• Shrinking Tubes Assortment
• Shrink Tube Temple End Assortment
F 68
F 68
F 68
Long Temple Ends
• Length: 135 mm – Thin Type
• Length: 135 mm – Symmetrical Shape
F 69
F 69
Temples
•
•
•
•
•
•
Standard Temples – Nickel Free
Temples with Duplex Joint
Temples with Flex Hinges – Nickel Free
Temples with RAL Joint (American Joint)
Acetate Temples
Spare Temple and Front Hinge for Rimless Frames
with Sleeves Mounting
• Bridge for Rimless Frames with Sleeves Mounting
• Hingeless Temple for Rimless Frames
with Sleeves Mounting
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 55
F 70
F 70
F 71– F 72
F 72
F 73– F 74
F 75
F 75
F 75
06.02.14 14:22
Standard Temple End
Length: 64 mm
PP Temple End – Small Opening
Sealed end for high quality titanium frames.
Blue transparent
1.0 mm
0726 25
10 pieces
Transparent
1.0 mm
0726 27
10 pieces
Anthracite transparent
1.0 mm
0726 28
10 pieces
1.0 mm
0704 11
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0704 21
10 pieces
1.0 mm
0705 17
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0705 27
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0712 41
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0712 61
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0712 42
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0712 62
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0703 00
10 pieces
Length: 65 mm
2-Components Temple End – Modern Design
F
56
The combination of acetate and silicone provides stability.
The coloured soft non-slipping silicone offer a high comfort.
Black/Dark grey
Grey/Transparent
Temple End – Classic Shape
Black
Brown
Temple End – Large Opening
Havana
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 56
06.02.14 14:22
Standard Temple End
Length: 65 mm
Acetate Temple End – Symmetrical Shape
Black
Brown
Havana
Transparent
Grey
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 57
1.25 mm
0714 21
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0714 41
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0714 61
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0714 71
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0714 22
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0714 42
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0714 62
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0714 72
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0714 23
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0714 43
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0714 63
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0714 73
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0714 24
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0714 44
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0714 64
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0714 74
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0714 27
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0714 47
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0714 67
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0714 77
10 pieces
F
57
06.02.14 14:22
Standard Temple End
Length: 65 mm
Acetate Temple End – Thin Type
Black
Brown
F
58
Havana
Transparent
1.25 mm
0711 21
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0711 41
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0711 61
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0711 71
10 pieces
1.9 mm
0711 91
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0711 22
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0711 42
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0711 62
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0711 72
10 pieces
1.9 mm
0711 92
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0711 23
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0711 43
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0711 63
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0711 73
10 pieces
1.9 mm
0711 93
10 pieces
1.25 mm
0711 24
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0711 44
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0711 64
10 pieces
1.7 mm
0711 74
10 pieces
1.9 mm
0711 94
10 pieces
Temple End – Symmetrical Shape
Black
Brown
Havana
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 58
1.2 mm
0709 21
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0709 41
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0709 61
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0709 22
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0709 42
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0709 62
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0709 23
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0709 43
10 pieces
1.6 mm
0709 63
10 pieces
06.02.14 14:22
Standard Temple End
Length: 67 mm
Acetate Temple End – Small Opening
Black
1.0 mm
0713 01
10 pieces
Brown
1.0 mm
0713 02
10 pieces
Transparent
1.0 mm
0713 04
10 pieces
1.1 mm
0727 27
10 pieces
Length: 70 mm
Temple End Hard
Transparent
Temple End – Classic Shape
F
59
Transparent
1.5 mm
0794 08
10 pieces
Black
1.5 mm
0794 10
10 pieces
Dark brown
1.5 mm
0794 16
10 pieces
Black
0.9 mm
0754 01
10 pieces
Brown
0.9 mm
0754 16
10 pieces
Transparent
0.9 mm
0754 27
10 pieces
Black
1.4 mm
0797 10
10 pieces
Dark brown
1.4 mm
0797 16
10 pieces
Transparent
1.4 mm
0797 27
10 pieces
Temple End – Small Opening
Length: 75 mm
Temple End – Classic Shape to extend Temples
To extend frame temples by at least 10 mm.
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 59
06.02.14 14:22
Silicone Temple End
Length: 60 mm
Silicone Temple End – Small Opening
Solid coloured temple ends.
Black
1.0 mm
0710 01
10 pieces
Brown
1.0 mm
0710 02
10 pieces
Transparent
1.0 mm
0710 04
10 pieces
Length: 65 mm
Silicone Temple End – Small Opening
One end closed for metal temple 0.9 to 1.5 mm, hypo-allergenic, easy to fit, just moisten with liquid soap.
F
60
Black
0.9 to 1.5 mm flexible
0756 01
10 pieces
Brown
0.9 to 1.5 mm flexible
0756 16
10 pieces
Transparent
0.9 to 1.5 mm flexible
0756 27
10 pieces
1.0 mm
0795 11
10 pieces
1.4 mm
0795 01
10 pieces
1.0 mm
0795 17
10 pieces
1.4 mm
0795 07
10 pieces
Length: 70 mm
Silicone Temple End
Black
Dark brown
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 60
06.02.14 14:22
Temple End with Square Opening
Length: 63 mm
Silicone Temple End – For Straight Temples
2.6 x 1.5 mm
0715 01
10 pieces
2.6 x 1.5 mm
0715 02
10 pieces
4.0 x 1.3 mm
0789 00
10 pieces
Black
Brown
Temple End – Flat, Square Opening
Black
F
61
Length: 70 mm
Temple End – Flat Opening
Transparent brown
2.5 x 1.0 mm
0783 02
10 pieces
2.7 x 1.3 mm
0757 00
10 pieces
Temple End – Flat Opening
For thin metal temples.
Black
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 61
06.02.14 14:22
Tips & Tricks
www.youtube.com/user/BreitfeldSchliekert
Easy mounting of
sport temple ends
Nothing slips!
Sport Temple Ends
e.g. No. 0735 . .
Universal Pen
No. 2623 01
Double Joint Front Cutter
No. 1579 79 N
F
62
Precision File
No. 1868 00
Frame Heater
No. 2871 01
approx. 5 minutes
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 62
06.02.14 14:22
This is how it works
Preparations for all sport temple tips
Marking
Cutting
Cutting some notches
1
2
3
Mark the end position of the sport temple end
on the temple.
Cut the temple 1 cm behind the marking
towards the temple end with a side cutter.
For a better grip cut some notches with a file
into the 1cm long end piece.
Applying the sport temple ends No. 0735 . ., 0736 . ., 0717 . ., 0718 . . and 0728 . .
with heating procedure
Heating
Pushing
Cooling
4
5
6
Heat the temple and the sport temple end for
30 seconds at 130 °C.
Then push the sport temple end onto the
temple.
F
63
Leave to cool.
Applying the sport temple ends No. 0730 . . and 0731 . . with cold procedure
Cold pushing
Done
4
5
Push the sport temple end onto the temple.
Optional: pressing
Done.
TIP: If the temple is thinner then 1.3 mm use a vice to flatten and widen the end.
TIP: Sport temple ends on plastic temples? Expose the metal inlay!
Cut off 1 cm only of the plastic on the temple and detach it.
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 63
06.02.14 14:22
Tips & Tricks
Easy mounting of sport temple ends –
page F 62 and F 63
Sports Temple Ends made of Silicone
F
64
Thickness of silicone coating: 1.2 mm,
optimal protection, optimal padding
Plastic
Silicone
For supplementary application on metal temples and inserts
of plastic temples.
Assembling range: approx. 1.0 to 1.1 mm
Ø inner: 0.9 mm
Ø outer: 3.4 mm
0717 . .
1 pair
0718 . .
1 pair
Children: Length 75 mm
Adults: Length 90 mm
Order No.
Colour
Order No.
Colour
0717 01
Black
0718 01
Black
0717 03
Blue
0718 03
Blue
0717 05
Red
0718 16
Brown
0717 07
Green
0718 19
Bordeaux
0717 19
Bordeaux
Silicone Temple End Assortment
In snap lid boxes.
Contents: 1 pair each No. 0717 01; 0717 03; 0717 05; 0717 07 and
0717 19 plus No. 0718 01; 0718 03; 0718 16 and 0718 19
We reserve the right to change the assortment.
0717 55
9 pairs
Silicone Temple End Replacement Set
0717 50
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 64
9 pairs
06.02.14 14:22
Tips & Tricks
Easy mounting of sport temple ends –
page F 62 and F 63
B&S Quality temple ends are reassuringly well-engineered.
They have no rough spots and the especially thick cushion ensures comfortable wearing.
Sports Temple Ends made of Silicone
Thickness of silicone coating: 1.2 mm,
optimal protection, optimal padding
Plastic
Silicone
For supplementary application on metal temples and inserts
of plastic temples.
Assembling range: approx. 1.4 to 1.5 mm
Ø inner: 1.3 mm
Ø outer: 3.8 mm
0735 . .
1 pair
0736 . .
1 pair
Children: Length 75 mm
F
65
Adults: Length 90 mm
Order No.
Colour
Order No.
Colour
0735 01
Black
0736 01
Black
0735 02
Grey
0736 02
Grey
0735 03
Navy
0736 03
Navy
0735 04
Lilac
0736 05
Red
0735 05
Red
0736 07
Green
0735 07
Green
0736 16
Brown
0735 12
Light blue
0736 19
Bordeaux
0735 16
Brown
0735 19
Bordeaux
Silicone Temple End Assortment
In snap lid boxes..
Contents: 2 pairs each No. 0735 01; 0735 03; 0735 05; 0735 07,
0735 12 and 0735 19 plus 3 pairs each No. 0736 01;
0736 02; 0736 03 and 0736 16
We reserve the right to change the assortment.
0735 70
24 pairs
Silicone Temple End Replacement Set
0735 65
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 65
24 pairs
06.02.14 14:22
Tips & Tricks
Easy mounting of sport temple ends –
page F 62 and F 63
Sports Temple Ends made of Silicone
For supplementary application on metal temples and inserts
of plastic temples.
Assembling range: approx. 1.3 to 1.4 mm
Ø inner:
1.3 mm
Ø outer children:
4.0 mm
Ø outer adults:
4.2 mm
F
66
Thickness of silicone coating: 0.7 mm
0730 . .
1 pair
0731 . .
1 pair
Children
Children: Length 80 mm
Adults
Plastic
Silicone
Adults: Length 95 mm
Order No.
Colour
Order No.
Colour
0730 01
Black
0731 01
Black
0730 02
Grey
0731 02
Grey (with a
0730 03
Petrol
0730 04
Purple
0731 16
Dark brown
0730 05
Red
0731 19
Bordeaux
0730 06
Pink
0731 21
Blue
0730 07
Green
0730 10
Yellow
0730 11
Orange
0730 12
Light blue
0730 16
Dark brown
0730 21
Blue
textured surface)
Silicone Temple End Assortment
In snap lid boxes.
Contents: 1 pair each No. 0730 01; 0730 03; 0730 05; 0730 06;
0730 07; 0730 10; 0730 11; 0730 12; 0730 16 and
0730 21 plus No. 0731 01; 0731 02; 0731 16; 0731 19
and 0731 21
We reserve the right to change the assortment.
0730 55
15 pairs
Silicone Temple End Replacement Set
0730 50
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 66
15 pairs
06.02.14 14:22
Tips & Tricks
Easy mounting of sport temple ends –
page F 62 and F 63
Sports Temple End
For supplementary application on metal temples and inserts of plastic temples.
Assembling range: approx. 1.4 to 1.5 mm
Ø inner: 1.3 mm
Ø outer: 3.0 mm
Adults: Length 90 mm
0728 01
Black
1 pair
without silicone coating
Plastic
Please also note our PlastiDip – the multipurpose rubber coating on page E 20 and our shrinking tubes on page F 68.
F
67
MEGALOCK Temple End
Silicone, can be used with plastic and metal temples, firm hold.
Ø inner: 5.9 x 2.7 mm
8903 0 .
10 pairs
8903 5 .
50 pairs
8903 01
Black
8903 51
Black
8903 02
Transparent
8903 52
Transparent
Non-slip Temple End
Similar as No. 8903 . ., but in large pack.
Ø inner: 5.9 x 2.7 mm
0729 1 .
* Extra small hole
for thin temples
0729 . .
100 pieces
0729 10
Transparent
0729 00
Transparent
0729 11
Black
0729 01
Black
0729 15
Blue
0729 05
Blue
Ø inner: 2.8 x 1.8 mm
0729 1 .
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 67
20 pieces
20 pieces
0729 . .
100 pieces
0729 12*
Transparent
0729 02*
Transparent
0729 13*
Black
0729 03*
Black
0729 14*
Blue
0729 04*
Blue
06.02.14 14:22
Shrinking tubes made of polyolefin have the following advantages in comparison to PVC:
• Without plasticiser
• Dimensional accuracy is guaranteed
• Absolutely harmless to health during work
• No shrinkage even at higher storage temperatures (40 to 50 °C)
• UV resistant
• No melting
Shrinking Tubes
Length: 3 x 1 m
Shrinking temperature: 120 °C
Ø inner: 3.2 mm
Ø after shrinking: 1.5 to 1.6 mm
0784 . .
F
68
Please take note of our
(shrinking) tubes No. 0759 00
and 0759 10 on page F 49.
0784 50
White
0784 55
Black
0784 51
Transparent
0784 56
Grey
0784 52
Red
0784 57
Green
0784 53
Blue
0784 59
Brown
0784 54
Yellow
Shrinking Tubes Assortment
Same as No. 0784 . ., but selected colours.
1 pack = 10 pieces à 1 m
0784 33
Shrinking Tubes
Length: 3 x 1 m
Shrinking temperature: 160 to 170 °C
Ø inner: 1.6 mm
Ø after shrinking: 0.8 mm
0785 5 .
0785 51
0785 55
Transparent
Black
Shrink Tube Temple End Assortment
Length: 80 mm, 1 end closed.
Colour: Black
Shrinking temperature: 150 °C
Ø inner: 3.0 mm
Ø after shrinking: 1.5 mm
0734 01
10 pairs
Shrinking Tubes – High transparency
For all metal and plastic temples, hypo-allergenic.
Length: 3 x 1 m
0787 . .
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 68
Order No.
Flat width
Ø inner
Ø after shrinking
0787 04
4.0 mm
2.4 mm
approx. 1.3 mm
0787 05
5.0 mm
3.0 mm
approx. 1.6 mm
0787 08
8.0 mm
5.1 mm
approx. 2.8 mm
06.02.14 14:22
Long Temple Ends
Length: 135 mm
Acetate Temple End – Thin Type
Black
Havana
1.0 mm
0707 01
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0707 21
10 pieces
1.0 mm
0707 03
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0707 23
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0708 21
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0708 41
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0708 22
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0708 42
10 pieces
1.2 mm
0708 23
10 pieces
1.45 mm
0708 43
10 pieces
Acetate Temple End – Symmetrical Shape
Black
Brown
Havana
F
69
Temple End Assortment
Contents: 10 high-quality, modern temple ends
in practical snap-lid boxes
We reserve the right to change the assortment.
0790 01
100 pieces
Silicone Spare Parts also suitable for hypersensitivity
Due to deposits (cosmetics/skin oil) we recommend replacing
after approx. 3 to 4 months.
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 69
06.02.14 14:22
Standard Temples – Nickel Free – Length 140 mm
2.5 mm
0.8 mm
1038 00
1 pair
2.5 mm
1.0 mm
1043 00
1 pair
3.2 mm
1.2 mm
1045 00
1 pair
3.6 mm
1.4 mm
1046 00
1 pair
2.5 mm
0.8 mm
1038 01
1 pair
2.5 mm
1.0 mm
1043 01
1 pair
3.2 mm
1.2 mm
1045 01
1 pair
3.6 mm
1.4 mm
1046 01
1 pair
2.5 mm
0.8 mm
1038 02
1 pair
2.5 mm
1.0 mm
1043 02
1 pair
3.2mm
1.2 mm
1045 02
1 pair
3.6 mm
1.4 mm
1046 02
1 pair
2.5 mm
0.8 mm
1038 03
1 pair
2.5 mm
1.0 mm
1043 03
1 pair
3.2 mm
1.2 mm
1045 03
1 pair
3.6 mm
1.4 mm
1046 03
1 pair
2.5 mm
0.8 mm
1038 04
1 pair
2.5 mm
1.0 mm
1043 04
1 pair
3.2 mm
1.2 mm
1045 04
1 pair
3.6 mm
1.4 mm
1046 04
1 pair
0.95 mm
1023 00
1 pair
Silver
1023 01
1 pair
Black
1023 02
1 pair
Gold
Silver
F
70
Black
Gun
Blue
Temples with Duplex Joint – Length 140 mm
Gold
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 70
2.8 mm
06.02.14 14:22
Temples with Flex Hinges – Nickel Free – Length 140 mm
3.3 mm
0.8 mm
1039 00
1 pair
3.3 mm
1.0 mm
1040 00
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.2 mm
1041 00
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.4 mm
1042 00
1 pair
3.3 mm
0.8 mm
1039 01
1 pair
3.3 mm
1.0 mm
1040 01
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.2 mm
1041 01
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.4 mm
1042 01
1 pair
3.3 mm
0.8 mm
1039 02
1 pair
3.3 mm
1.0 mm
1040 02
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.2 mm
1041 02
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.4 mm
1042 02
1 pair
3.3 mm
0.8 mm
1039 03
1 pair
3.3 mm
1.0 mm
1040 03
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.2 mm
1041 03
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.4 mm
1042 03
1 pair
3.3 mm
0.8 mm
1039 04
1 pair
3.3 mm
1.0 mm
1040 04
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.2 mm
1041 04
1 pair
3.5 mm
1.4 mm
1042 04
1 pair
1054 11
1 pair
Gold
1054 12
1 pair
Black
1054 13
1 pair
Gold
Silver
Black
Gun
Blue
F
71
Temples with RAL Joint (American Joint) – Length 145 mm
Silver
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 71
1.3 mm
0.95 mm
06.02.14 14:22
Temples with Flex Hinges – Nickel Free – Length 140 mm
Gold
Silver
F
72
Black
Gun
Blue
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 72
2.2 mm
0.8 mm
1027 00
1 pair
2.2 mm
1.0 mm
1028 00
1 pair
2.8 mm
1.2 mm
1029 00
1 pair
3.0 mm
1.4 mm
1030 00
1 pair
2.2 mm
0.8 mm
1027 01
1 pair
2.2 mm
1.0 mm
1028 01
1 pair
2.8 mm
1.2 mm
1029 01
1 pair
3.0 mm
1.4 mm
1030 01
1 pair
2.2 mm
0.8 mm
1027 02
1 pair
2.2 mm
1.0 mm
1028 02
1 pair
2.8 mm
1.2 mm
1029 02
1 pair
3.0 mm
1.4 mm
1030 02
1 pair
2.2 mm
0.8 mm
1027 03
1 pair
2.2 mm
1.0 mm
1028 03
1 pair
2.8 mm
1.2 mm
1029 03
1 pair
3.0 mm
1.4 mm
1030 03
1 pair
2.2 mm
0.8 mm
1027 04
1 pair
2.2 mm
1.0 mm
1028 04
1 pair
2.8 mm
1.2 mm
1029 04
1 pair
3.0 mm
1.4 mm
1030 04
1 pair
06.02.14 14:22
Acetate Temples – Length 140 mm
1047 00
1 pair
Transparent
1047 01
1 pair
Dark havana
1047 02
1 pair
Light havana
1047 03
1 pair
Black
3.0 mm
1.0 mm
F
73
1048 00
1 pair
Transparent
1048 01
1 pair
Dark havana
1048 02
1 pair
Light havana
1048 03
1 pair
1049 00
1 pair
Transparent
1049 01
1 pair
Dark havana
1049 02
1 pair
Light havana
1049 03
1 pair
Black
Black
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 73
3.5 mm
5.0 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
06.02.14 14:22
Acetate Temples – Length 140 mm
1050 00
1 pair
Transparent
1050 01
1 pair
Dark havana
1050 02
1 pair
Light havana
1050 03
1 pair
1051 00
1 pair
Transparent
1051 01
1 pair
Dark havana
1051 02
1 pair
Light havana
1051 03
1 pair
1052 00
1 pair
Transparent
1052 01
1 pair
Dark havana
1052 02
1 pair
Light havana
1052 03
1 pair
Black
6.3 mm
1.2 mm
F
74
Black
Black
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 74
9.0 mm
10.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.4 mm
06.02.14 14:22
Spare Temple and Front Hinge for Rimless Frames with Sleeves Mounting – Length 140 mm
1056 00
1 pair
1056 01
1 pair
Black
1056 02
1 pair
Gun
1056 03
1 pair
Blue
1056 04
1 pair
Brown
1056 05
1 pair
Gold
Material: Stainless Steel
Silver
1.75 mm
0.7 mm
F
75
Bridge for Rimless Frames with Sleeves Mounting
• Material: Stainless Steel
• For sleeves with an inner diameter of 0.8 mm
1055 . .
29 mm
1055 00
Gold
approx. 17 mm
1055 01
Silver
1055 02
Black
1055 03
Gun
1055 04
Blue
1055 05
Brown
Hingeless Temple for Rimless Frames with Sleeves Mounting – Length 140 mm
1057 00
1 pair
1057 01
1 pair
Black
1057 02
1 pair
Gun
1057 03
1 pair
Blue
1057 04
1 pair
Brown
1057 05
1 pair
Gold
Silver
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 75
Material: Stainless Steel
1.6 mm
06.02.14 14:22
TENAX Strips
• As interlining to be stuck
into the frame groove
• Length: 50 mm, width: 3 mm
• 1 pack = 2 sheets with
36 adhesive strips each
0733 01
0.2 mm
Lens Washer (Liner) –
Self-adhesive
Lens Washer (Liner) –
Acetate
• As interlining to be stuck
into the frame groove
• Width: 1.7 mm
• Colour: Transparent
• 1 pack = 16 m
• Colour: Transparent
• 1 pack = approx. 3 m
0733 00
0743 10
1.2 mm
0.1 mm
F
76
Lens Washer –
CYREX
Lens Washer (Liner) –
PVC
• Handmade frames insert with
V-bevel for optimum use
• Colour: Transparent
• Colour: Transparent
0750 00
1.6 mm
1 pack = 6 m
0750 10
1.6 mm
1 pack = 10 x 6 m
0743 30
1.4 mm
1 pack = 3.5 m
0752 00
1.2 mm
1 pack = 6 m
0743 35
1.4 mm
1 pack = 12 x 3.5 m
0752 10
1.2 mm
1 pack = 10 x 6 m
Fitting Strip
Nylon Thread Hook
For easy assembly of lenses
into supra frames.
1719 00
1368 00
5.0 mm
10 m
Glass Adhesive
To glue lenses into all types of frames, also to be applied as a liquid lining.
Contents: 9 ml
3177 00
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 76
06.02.14 14:22
Nylon Liner 8-Profile
• For metal frames
1367 00
0.55 mm
2m
Nylon Thread
20 cm
0.5 mm
1370 00
Opaque
100 pieces
1370 01
Black
100 pieces
Nylon Thread – Transparent
Nylon Thread – Transparent
• High-strength and extremely strong
F
77
1370 02
0.5 mm
1370 03
20 m
0.4 mm
20 m
Nylon Set, 5 Spools
Nylon Thread
Contents: 8-profile 0.51 and 0.55 mm,
T-profile 1.3 mm, nylon thread
0.50 and 0.60 mm
• Colour: Transparent
1369 55
1369 2 .
1369 21
0.50 mm
20 m
1369 23
0.60 mm
20 m
1369 24
1.00 mm
15 m
Nylon Liner 8-Profile
Nylon Liner T-Profile
Lens Washer (Liner), Nylon
• For metal frames
• Colour: Transparent
• For plastic and metal frames
• Colour: Transparent
• Colour: Transparent
1369 0 .
1369 1 .
0743 40
1369 00
0.51 mm
10 m
1369 10
1.3 mm
5m
1369 01
0.55 mm
10 m
1369 11
2.0 mm
5m
1369 02
0.61 mm
10 m
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 77
5m
1.2 mm
06.02.14 14:22
Cement Strips – Acetate
0742 00
0.36 mm
100 pieces
Acetate Sheets
• Colour: Transparent
130 x 80 mm
0744 00
0.5 mm
3 pieces
0744 10
1.0 mm
3 pieces
Acetate Sheets
F
78
A complete frame can be made out of this material. The set includes
metal injected temples and 2 hidden hinges.
We reserve the right to change the colours.
0744 20
150 x 8 x 65 mm
Plastic Material
To make practice pieces in various styles.
0744 3 .
150 x 6 x 65 mm
2 pieces
0744 31
Havana
0744 33
Blue
0744 32
Black
0744 34
Transparent
Eye Lid Lifter
For soldering or screwing.
0295 00
Eye Wire
Half round, smooth.
1361 02
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 78
1.7 mm
1m
06.02.14 14:23
Soldering Set
To assemble one complete metal frame with
double bridge and golf temples.
Eyewires are curved and shaped.
We reserve the right to make changes
to the composition.
1353 00
Soldering Kits
Different levels of difficulties,
4 to 10 soldering joints.
Eyewires are curved and shaped.
We reserve the right to make changes
to the composition.
F
79
Level of difficulty: Low
Contents: Eye rims, nose bridge
1354 00
Level of difficulty: High
Contents: Eye rims, nose bridge, nose pad
arms, nose pads, hinges,
frame bridge
1354 03
Chapter_F_Part_4_V06.indd 79
06.02.14 14:23
G
Working and Organising Aids
G2
G5
G8
Job Trays
Small Parts Magazines and Hinged Boxes
Price Tags and Job Bags
Job Trays – Large Size – Frosted
•
•
•
•
Coloured
Transparent – Extra High – 63 mm
• Total size (w x h x d): 190 x 50 x 270 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 159 x 44 x 242 mm
• Total size (w x h x d): 190 x 68 x 270 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 159 x 63 x 242 mm
10 pieces with labels
1448 . .
G
2
Fresh colours
Both trays fit together
With label pocket and grip tab
Both trays are combinable
10 pieces with labels
1449 27
1448 03
Purple semi-transparent
1448 04
Pink semi-transparent
1448 07
Green semi-transparent
1448 11
Orange semi-transparent
1448 12
Light blue semi-transparent
1448 27
Clear semi-transparent
Clear semi-transparent
That Fits.
These B&S job trays are produced in Europe using CNC controlled high-tech injection moulding machines.
This production technology contributes to a high degree of precision fitting and processing quality. Due to high demand we have now
added to the proven standard size an extra high version for sports frames and sunglasses with high frame curvatures and their cases.
G
3
Job Trays – Large Size
•
•
•
•
Solid, sturdy plastic
Both trays fit together
With label pocket and grip tab
Both trays are combinable
Transparent – Extra High – 65 mm
Coloured
• For high curved frames
• Total size (w x h x d): 170 x 67 x 255 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 166 x 65 x 230 mm
• Total size (w x h x d): 170 x 47 x 255 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 166 x 45 x 230 mm
10 pieces with labels
10 pieces with labels
1454 . .
1452 . .
1452 12
Light blue
1454 02
Grey
1452 27
Transparent
1454 05
Red
1454 12
Light blue
1454 27
Transparent
All job trays fit together, have a label pocket and a grip tab.
Job Trays made of Recyclable Plastic
Metal Stand for Job Trays Average Size
• Both trays are combinable
•
•
•
•
To store 10 (48 mm high) or 8 (70 mm high) job trays
Easy handling due to a practical carry handle
Job trays not included
Size: 20 x 63 x 24 cm
Average Size
• Extra high – 65 mm
• With separate divisions for lenses and small parts
• Total size (w x h x d): 170 x 70 x 262 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 162 x 65 x 255 mm
Opposite you will find the suitable metal stand No. 1479 01.
G
4
1479 00
2.2 kg
For 8 extra high job trays No. 1447 . .
10 pieces with labels
1447 27
For 10 job trays No. 1456 . .
1479 01
Transparent
1.8 kg
Average Size
• With separate divisions for lenses and small parts
• Total size (w x h x d): 170 x 48 x 262 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 162 x 43 x 255 mm
Opposite you will find the suitable metal stand No. 1479 00.
Job Tray – Small Size
10 pieces with labels
• Total size (w x h x d):142 x 39 x 240 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 138 x 36 x 216 mm
1456 05
Red
1456 27
Transparent
1456 28
Smoked glass
10 pieces with labels
1455 27
Foam insert
•
•
•
•
For job trays with divisions No. 1447. . and 1456 . .
Lenses can be removed easily – even with short or artificial fingernails
Protects against chipping
Colour: Anthracite
1456 30
80 x 10 x 80 mm
20 pieces
Transparent
Job Tray Labels
• 1-sided foil coating (rewritable)
10 pieces
0076 00
For No. 1448 . . and 1449 27
0078 00
For No. 1455 . .
0077 00
For No. 1452 . . and 1454 . .
0079 00
For No. 1456 . . and 1447 . .
Small Parts Organiser
Insert
Unbreakable polystyrol, transparent
cover with triple hinge, no dividers, to
accommodate 2 inserts (available for
No. 1446 00 and 1451 00 as needed).
Total size (w x h x d): 183 x 30 x 108 mm
For assortment box No. 1445 00,
divided into 9 big compartments.
1451 00
Insert
For assortment box No. 1445 00,
divided into 25 small compartments.
1445 00
1446 00
Quick Box Assortment
Unit
Insert
Grey housing, 2 transparent drawers,
transparent dividers for 4 compartments
of same size.
Total size (w x h x d): 130.5 x 73 x 182 mm
For screws, hinges, nose pads,
rhinestones and other spare parts.
1450 00
1420 01
Insert
Divider for Quick Box
Grey/Transparent
For drill bits or millers,
10 deep compartments.
Large, for longitudinal division
of the quick box drawer.
5 pieces
1420 05
1420 56
Divider for Quick Box
Grey/Transparent
Small parts box
Small, for cross division
of the quick box drawer.
10 pieces
1420 59
With 7 separately opening compartments.
Colour: Transparent
3 pieces
1437 00
8.7 cm
G
5
Little boxes –
great benefits!
Make room, clean up and always ready for
work: the perfect place to store frame parts.
Hinged Boxes
• Transparent, self-closing lid
• All sides interlock
• All sizes fit together
G
6
Hinged Boxes
Hinged Box Grey
• For nose pads, screws etc.
• Total size (w x h x d): 42 x 18 x 57 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 37 x 15 x 40 mm
• For temple tips
• Total size (w x h x d): 63 x 18 x 85 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 57 x 15 x 68 mm
4 pieces
4 pieces
1457 10
White
1458 20
Blue
Hinged Box White
• For screws, washers and nuts
• Total size (w x h x d): 43 x 18 x 29 mm
• Inner size (w x h x d): 37 x 15 x 12 mm
4 pieces
1457 20
1459 30
Small Parts Magazine, with 3 Drawers,
including Hinged Boxes
• Complete with:
36 hinged boxes – No. 1457 10, white, empty
36 hinged boxes – No. 1458 20, blue, empty
16 hinged boxes – No. 1459 30, grey, empty
• Case colour: Light grey
• Total size (w x h x d): 265 x 108 x 364 mm
1459 50
Small Parts Magazine, with 3 Drawers,
without Hinged Boxes
• White, blue, grey – for storage of small parts
• Suitable for hinged boxes No. 1457 10, 1457 20, 1458 20
and 1459 30
• Maximum number of hinged boxes per drawer see No. 1459 50
• Case colour: Light grey
• Total size (w x h x d): 265 x 108 x 364 mm
1458 50
Complimentary Offer!
G
7
When ordering a minimum of 20 different frame parts
you will receive the matching boxes absolutely free!
Assembly example
Price Tags
stable
• Price tags for almost all frame models
• To slide onto the temple
• To be used with:
1. Lens marking pen (clean with spirit)
2. Labels No. 0081 00
500 pieces
12 mm
11 mm
33 mm
flexible
200 pieces each
17 mm
13 mm
17 mm
17 mm
36 mm
36 mm
0083 00
0083 10
11 mm
15 mm
57 mm
G
8
0083 40
Self-adhesive Labels
22 mm
26 mm
65 x 10 mm, divisible in two equal parts
53 mm
0081 00
0083 60
PVC Bag opticover
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Suitable for all B & S price tags
• White paper
Suitable for DIN A5 worksheets
Visible content because of the transparent PVC material of the bag
Stable and flexible at the same time
Easy to open
Rounded corners
Frames, lenses and worksheet in one bag
154 x 220 mm
1442 00
20 pieces
1442 10
100 pieces
264 pieces
0080 01
Job Bag with Zipper
•
•
•
•
•
Suitable for DIN A5 sheets
Visible contents because of the transparent PE material of the bag
Stable and flexible at the same time
Easy zipped opening
For improved organization in the workshop because frame, lenses
and file card are in one bag
• Perfect transport solution for external glazing
175 x 220 mm
1436 00
20 pieces
G
9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement